JP2022000077A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest of a game by the movement of a movable body.SOLUTION: As a cut-in performance, the game machine can execute a first predetermined performance for moving a rotating part 038SG401A of a character panel 038SG400A after moving and displaying an image A-1Z toward the position where the rotating part 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A is provided, a second predetermined performance for operating a rotating part 038SG401B of a character panel 038SG400B after moving and displaying an image A -2Z toward the position where the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B is provided, and a third predetermined performance for operating a rotating part 038SG401C of a character panel 038SG400C after moving and displaying an image A-3Z toward the position where the rotating part 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C is provided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-33

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, are equipped with movable bodies that can operate.

As a game machine of this type, for example, a side display device (movable body) rotatably provided about a rotation axis facing in the vertical direction is provided on the left and right sides of the game area (for example, Patent Document 1). (See), and some of which are provided so that a plurality of character accessories (movable bodies) can move and rotate (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-192165 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-187153

In the gaming machines described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, there is room for improvement in the operation of the movable body.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by the movement of a movable body.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A display means capable of displaying at least a first character display, a second character display different from the first character display, and a third character display different from the second character display.
The first movable body corresponding to the first character display, the second movable body provided at a position different from the first movable body and corresponding to the second character display, the first movable body and the second movable body. A plurality of movable bodies including a third movable body provided at a position different from the body and corresponding to the third character display, and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first predetermined effect of moving and displaying the first character display toward a position where the first movable body is provided and then operating the first movable body.
A second predetermined effect of moving and displaying the second character display toward a position where the second movable body is provided and then operating the second movable body.
A third predetermined effect in which the third character display is moved and displayed toward a position where the third movable body is provided and then the third movable body is operated.
Is feasible,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by a plurality of predetermined effects in which the character display and the predetermined movable body are linked.
Further, the gaming machine according to claim 2 is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A display means capable of displaying at least a first character display, a second character display different from the first character display, and a third character display different from the second character display.
The first movable body corresponding to the first character display, the second movable body provided at a position different from the first movable body and corresponding to the second character display, the first movable body and the second movable body. A plurality of movable bodies including a third movable body provided at a position different from the body and corresponding to the third character display, and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first predetermined effect of operating the first movable body and then moving and displaying the first character display in a direction away from the position corresponding to the first movable body.
A second predetermined effect of operating the second movable body and then moving and displaying the second character display in a direction away from the position corresponding to the second movable body.
A third predetermined effect of operating the third movable body and then moving and displaying the third character display in a direction away from the position corresponding to the third movable body.
Is feasible,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by a plurality of predetermined effects in which the character display and the predetermined movable body are linked.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a loss with a time saving. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the feature part 038SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example in an effect control board. It is a figure which illustrates the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table, the big hit type determination table, the small hit type determination table, and the big hit type. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect type determination process. (A) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body of each effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a front view showing an opening / closing door frame in a state where the movable body is located at the effect position. (A) is a plan view showing a state in which the movable body of each effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a plan view showing an opening / closing door frame in a state where the movable body is located at the effect position. (A) is a diagram showing an execution period and configuration of SP reach effect A corresponding to SP reach α, and (B) is a diagram showing an execution period and configuration of SP reach effect B corresponding to SP reach β. (A) is an explanatory diagram of SP reach effects A and B, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a character type. It is a figure which shows the flow (outline) of SP reach effect A. It is a figure which shows the flow (outline) of SP reach effect B. This is an example of an effect operation showing the flow from the effect parts N2 to SP2-4 of the SP reach effect B. This is an example of an effect operation showing the flow of the effect parts N2-5 to SP2-8 of the SP reach effect B. This is an example of an effect operation showing the flow from the effect parts N2-9 to SP2-11 of the SP reach effect B. (A) is a diagram showing an effect control example of the effect part SP2-2, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect operation control example of the effect part SP2-3. (A) is a diagram showing an effect control example of the effect part SP2-6, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect operation control example of the effect part SP2-7. (A) is a diagram showing an effect control example of the effect part SP2-8, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect operation control example of the effect part SP2-10. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the operation control data of the wing based on the extended command D033, and (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the contents of the control data of (A). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D033, and (B) (C) (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the contents of the control data of (A). It is a figure which shows the operation control data of a wing based on the extended command D036. It is a figure which shows the operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D036. It is a figure which shows the operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D008. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the operation control data of a wing based on the extended command D033. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D033. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the operation control data of a wing based on the extended command D036. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D036. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the operation control data of a character panel based on an extended command D008. (A) is a diagram showing the wing and the character panel described in the control data, (B) is a diagram showing the control data common to each extended command used for the operation control of the wing, and (C) is the operation of the character panel. It is a figure which shows the control data common to each extended command used for control. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a cut-in effect based on the effect pattern CP-4, and (B) is a diagram comparing the colors of the character panel LED and the cut-in image. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of a cut-in effect based on the effect pattern CP-4. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of a cut-in effect as a feature portion 038SG modification 1.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 038SG form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a feature unit 038SG).
A plurality of movable bodies including a first movable body (for example, wings 038SG221, 038SG321) and a second movable body (for example, rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D).
A movable body control means capable of controlling the plurality of movable bodies (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute operation control of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the wing 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D).
Equipped with
The movable body control means is
In the first scene in the specific effect, the movable body is controlled by using the first control data table (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the effect parts SP2-6 to SP2-8 of the SP reach effect B, FIG. 11 Based on the control data table shown in -24 and 11-25, a portion in which the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D are interlocked with each other in accordance with the rhythm of the effect sound, etc. FIGS. 11-20 to 11-21. (See),
In the second scene in the specific effect, the movable body is controlled by using the second control data table (for example, the effect control CPU 120 in the effect part SP2-2 of the SP reach effect B, FIGS. 11-22 and Based on the control data table shown in FIGS. 11-23, the enlarged images A-1Z to A are displayed during the display period from the start to the end of the enlarged display of the images A-1Z to A-4Z. A portion for individually rotating the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D corresponding to -4Z, etc. (see FIG. 11-19 (A)),
The first control data table is composed of control data that performs an operation corresponding to the effect sound output during the specific effect (see FIGS. 11-30).
The second control data table is composed of control data that performs an operation corresponding to the specific display displayed during the specific effect (see FIGS. 11-28).
In both the first control data table and the second control data table, the final control data is control data that does not operate the movable body (for example, the rotating unit 038SG401A such as "6000000, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]". Control data to stop, etc.),
In both the first control data table and the second control data table, the following control data is used for the control data other than the final control data by timing the period set in the control data.
In both the first control data table and the second control data table, the final control data is not used when a specific condition is satisfied before the period set in the final control data is timed (for example,). For control data different from the final control data in each control data table, the effect control CPU 120 can time the control period in which each control data is used (for example, a parent timer counter (parent TC) described later). The child timer counter (child TC), grandchild timer counter (grandson TC, etc.) is changed to the next control data by the timer up, and the control using each control data is terminated, while the final control data is used. The control is a portion where a specific condition is satisfied before the control timer capable of measuring the control period in which the final control data is used is timed up, and the control is terminated when the specific condition is satisfied. FIGS. 11-27 to FIG. 11-31),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the interest of the specific effect can be improved by the movement of the movable body, and when the specific condition is satisfied during the control by the final control data, the control is terminated, so that there is a problem such as abnormal operation of the movable body. Since it is possible to use the control data having a long control period as the final control data for controlling the movable body so as not to operate, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the operation malfunction of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The control data table is a lower control data table (for example, a grandchild control data table or a child control data table) and a control data table higher than the lower control data table, and the control using the lower control data table is used. A plurality of control data tables including a higher control data table (for example, a child control data table or a parent control data table) in which a period and a storage destination address of the lower control data table are defined are provided.
The specific condition includes that the control timer of the upper control data table is timer-up during the control period using the final control data of the lower control data table (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used by the child timer counter A). When the timer is up (child TCA = 0), the parent timer counter is checked, and if the parent timer counter is not timer up (parent TC> 0), the grandchild control data table 038SG821B described in the child control data table 038SG822A, A part that sequentially executes control based on the control data of 038SG821D, etc. (see FIG. 11-29),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by controlling a plurality of lower control data tables with the upper control data table, when the series of operations of the movable body is partially changed, only one lower control data table needs to be changed. Therefore, it becomes easier to deal with the occurrence of problems. Further, since the control data having a long control period can be used as the final control data, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the third embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect.
The control data table is a lower control data table (for example, a grandchild control data table or a child control data table) and a control data table higher than the lower control data table, and the control using the lower control data table is used. A plurality of control data tables including a higher control data table (for example, a child control data table or a parent control data table) in which a period and a storage destination address of the lower control data table are defined are provided.
The specific condition includes that the upper control data table is switched according to the switching display of the image of the display means during the control period using the final control data of the lower control data table (for example, the effect control CPU 120). However, when the child timer counter is timer-up (grandson TCA> 0, child TC = 0), the parent timer counter is checked, and if the parent timer counter is not timer-up (parent TC> 0), the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the control described next to the child control data table 038SG802 is determined according to the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is enlarged and displayed (for example, the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is switched and displayed from SP2-3A to SP2-3B). The part that shifts (changes) to data control, etc. (see Fig. 11-27),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by controlling a plurality of lower control data tables with the upper control data table, when the series of operations of the movable body is partially changed, only one lower control data table needs to be changed. Therefore, it becomes easier to deal with the occurrence of problems. Further, since the control data having a long control period can be used as the final control data, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third embodiments.
The control data table is
Subordinate control data tables (for example, grandchild control data tables 038SG801A, 038SG801B, 038SG821A to 038SG821D, etc.) and
A medium control data table (for example, a control data table higher than the lower control data table, in which the control period in which the lower control data table is used and the storage destination address of the lower control data table are defined. Child control data tables 038SG802, 038SG822A to 038SG822C, etc.) and
A control data table higher than the middle control data table, in which the control period in which the middle control data table is used and the storage destination address of the middle control data table are defined (upper control data table). For example, the parent control data table 038SG803, 038SG823, etc.) and
Including
The control data in the lower control data table defines a control period in which the control data is used, an operation period for one-step operation, and an operation upper limit (for example, FIGS. 11-22 and 11-). 24),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by controlling the lower control data table with the upper control data table, if the series of operations of the movable body is to be partially changed, it is sufficient to change the lower control data table. It becomes easier to deal with the occurrence of problems.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.
The final control data of the lower control data table, the middle control data table, and the upper control data table has a longer period than any control data different from the final control data, and has the same special control period (the same special control period ( For example, 6000000 ms (100 minutes), 600,000 ms (10 minutes), etc.) are set (see FIGS. 11-22 and 11-24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to use control data having a long control period as final control data for each layer, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of operational problems of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The specific effect (for example, SP reach effect B) includes a first effect period (for example, effect part SP2-1) and a second effect period (for example, effect part SP2-2-SP2-3).
What is the background image (for example, black screen display) displayed on the display means in the first effect period and the background image (for example, enlarged display, etc.) displayed on the display means in the second effect period? Different,
In the first effect period, the movable body operates because the control information for the movable body (for example, the extended command D033) for operating the movable body (for example, the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D) is not set. Without (see Figures 11-16),
In the second effect period, the control information for the movable body (for example, the extended command D033) common to the first movable body and the second movable body is set, so that the control for the movable body is controlled. Special control using the control data according to the information is executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation control based on the control data shown in FIGS. 11-23).
In the special control, one of the movable body (for example, the rotating portion 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D) of the first movable body and the second movable body operates from the start of the second effect period. However, the other movable body (for example, wing 038SG221, 038SG321) does not operate from the start of the second effect period, but operates after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start (for example, from effect part SP2-3 to wing 038SG221, 038SG321 opens and closes),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the control information for the movable body is not set in the effect period in which the movable body is not operated as in the first effect period, and is common to the first movable body and the second movable body in the second effect period. By setting the control information for a movable body, stable operation can be performed.

The gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The second movable body is composed of a first predetermined movable portion (for example, a rotating portion 038SG401A or a rotating portion 038SG401C) and a second predetermined movable portion (for example, a rotating portion 038SG401B or a rotating portion 038SG401D) that can be operated.
When the first predetermined movable portion and the second predetermined movable portion are operated individually, the first control data for operating the first predetermined movable portion and the second control data for operating the second predetermined movable portion are used. (For example, the parent control data table 038SG813A for operating the rotating unit 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A, the parent control data table 038SG813B for operating the rotating unit 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B, and the rotating unit of the character panel 038SG400C. A portion in which the parent control data table 038SG813C for operating the 038SG401C and the parent control data table 038SG813D for operating the rotating portion 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D are individually set (see FIG. 11-23).
When the first predetermined movable portion and the second predetermined movable portion are operated in common, the first control data is set, but the second control data is not set, and the first control data is used. By doing so, the first predetermined movable portion and the second predetermined movable portion operate in common (for example, control data for rotating the rotating portion 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A is set in the parent control data table 038SG833. By doing so, the rotating part 038SG401C of the lower left character panel 038SG400C is also rotated together. Further, the control data for rotating the rotating part 038SG401B of the upper right character panel 038SG400B is shown in the parent control data table 038SG843. Is set so that the rotating part 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D at the lower right also rotates together. See FIG. 11-25).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, individual control data is used when operating individually, and only one control data is used when operating in common, so that the data capacity can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
As an effect suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state), the specific effect (for example, SP reach effect B) and the effect controlled to the advantageous state rather than the specific effect are controlled. It is possible to execute a special effect (for example, SP reach effect A) with a low ratio.
In the specific effect and the special effect, it is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a decision effect) for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
In the special effect, the movable body control means does not operate the first movable body and the second movable body until the notification effect is started (see FIG. 11-13 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the specific effect, the movements of the first movable body and the second movable body, which are not executed in the special effect, are executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment.
The movable body control means is in the advantageous state (for example, a big hit) in the notification effect (for example, a determination effect) in the specific effect (for example, SP reach effect B) and the special effect (for example, SP reach effect A). When notifying that it is controlled by the game state, etc.), at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body is operated (for example, in the production parts SP1-4 and SP2-10, the character (Part where the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the special effect, the movable body does not operate until the notification effect, but when notifying that it is controlled to an advantageous state, it performs the same operation as the specific effect, so that the interest can be improved. ..

The gaming machine of the tenth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
With a special movable body (for example, the rotating portion 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D),
A movable body control means capable of controlling the special movable body (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute operation control of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D).
Equipped with
The movable body control means is
In the first scene, the special movable body is controlled by using the first control data table (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect data table shown in FIGS. 11-25 in the effect parts SP2-6 to SP2-8. 038SG401A to 038SG401D rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are subjected to operation control in the first operation pattern (rhythm matching).
In the second scene, the special movable body is controlled by using the second control data table (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the control data table shown in FIG. 11-23 in the effect part SP2-2. A part for executing operation control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the second operation pattern (display matching). See FIG. 11-19 (A).
In the third scene, the special movable body is controlled by using the third control data table (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the control data table shown in FIGS. 11-26 in the effect part SP2-10. A part for executing operation control of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the third operation pattern (operation matching of the movable body 32), etc., see FIG. 11-21 (B)).
The first control data table is composed of control data for performing the first operation corresponding to the effect sound (see FIG. 11-30).
The second control data table is composed of control data that performs a second operation corresponding to the specific display (see FIGS. 11-28).
The third control data table is composed of control data that performs an operation different from the first operation and the second operation (see FIGS. 11-31).
The first control data table, the second control data table, and the third control data table all include first common control data (for example, control data "&XD_J_LSHKU_CW") that causes the special movable body to operate in the first operation. It is configured to include the second common control data (for example, control data "&XD_J_LSHKU_CCW") that causes the special movable body to perform the second operation.
The first control data table, the second control data table, and the third control data table all use the first common control data and the second common control data for different times (FIGS. 11-32). (C)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by realizing a large number of operation patterns by managing time while using common control data, it is possible to improve the fun of the game while reducing the data capacity.

The gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth aspects.
The movable body control means executes the operation control of the first operation, the operation control of the second operation, and the operation control of the third operation in the special effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the SP reach effect B). In the SP reach effect (strongest) of the above, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be operated by the first operation pattern, the second operation pattern, and the third operation pattern. See FIG. 11-13).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the movable body can be operated in various patterns in one production, so that the fun of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of the form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 11.
A variable display means capable of executing variable display (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute variable display of a decorative pattern) is provided.
The special effect can be executed during the execution period of the variable display (see FIGS. 11-12).
The movable body control means can execute the operation control of the third operation pattern before the execution period of the special effect in the execution period of the variable display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform the SP reach effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120). In the production part N2-0 or the like prior to the strongest), the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D may be made operable by the third operation pattern based on the extended command D008. Modification example).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in various situations while reducing the data capacity.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth forms.
The movable body control means can execute the operation control of the third operation without corresponding to any of the rhythm of the effect sound and the effect display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is attached to the image display device 5). A part that can execute motion control based on the third motion pattern that rotates the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D according to the fall of the movable body 32 based on the motion control execution data of the process data regardless of the image display or sound output. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 14th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 13th embodiments.
A motion detection means (for example, a chance button 631B or a button sensor 635B) capable of detecting a player's motion is provided.
The movable body control means is
The motion control of the first motion and the motion control of the second motion can be executed regardless of the motion detection of the player by the motion detecting means.
The motion control of the third motion can be executed based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detecting means (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is a big hit for the variable display result, the chance button 631B is operated. The decision effect is executed at the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid period, or at the timing when the operation valid period ends without the operation of the chance button 631B being detected, and the movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the effect position. The part that can execute the operation control based on the third operation pattern that rotates the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D according to the timing of moving to),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the embodiments 1 to 14.
The special movable body includes a plurality of special movable bodies (for example, rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D).
The movable body control means is
When the plurality of special movable bodies are operated at the same time, at least one of the operation control of the first operation and the operation control of the third operation is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first operation pattern or the operation control. A portion that rotates the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D all at once in the third operation pattern),
When the plurality of special movable bodies are individually operated, the operation control of the second operation is executed (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 individually rotates the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D in the second operation pattern).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, each special movable body can be individually operated according to the effect display, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th aspects.
At least the first character display (for example, the image A-1Z of the ally A-1) and the second character display (for example, the image A-2Z of the ally A-2) different from the first character display and the second character display. A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a third character display (for example, an image A-3Z of an ally A-3) different from the above, and
The first predetermined movable body corresponding to the first character display (for example, the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A) and the second predetermined movable body provided at a position different from the first predetermined movable body and corresponding to the second character display. A movable body (for example, the rotating portion 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B) and a third predetermined movable body (for example, a third predetermined movable body provided at a position different from the first predetermined movable body and the second predetermined movable body and corresponding to the third character display). , A plurality of predetermined movable bodies including the rotating portion 038SG401C) of the character panel 038SG400C, and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a cut-in effect) and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first predetermined effect (FIGS. 11-33 (A1) (A2)) in which the first character display is moved and displayed toward a position where the first predetermined movable body is provided, and then the first predetermined movable body is operated. , See Figures 11-34) and
A second predetermined effect (FIGS. 11-33 (A3) (A4)) in which the second predetermined movable body is moved and displayed toward the position where the second predetermined movable body is provided, and then the second predetermined movable body is operated. , See Figures 11-34) and
A third predetermined effect (FIGS. 11-33 (A5) (A6)) in which the third predetermined movable body is moved and displayed toward a position where the third predetermined movable body is provided, and then the third predetermined movable body is operated. , See Figures 11-34) and
Is feasible,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by a plurality of predetermined effects in which the character display and the predetermined movable body are linked.

The gaming machine of the 17th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th aspects.
At least the first character display (for example, the image A-1Z of the ally A-1) and the second character display (for example, the image A-2Z of the ally A-2) different from the first character display and the second character display. A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a third character display (for example, an image A-3Z of an ally A-3) different from the above, and
The first predetermined movable body corresponding to the first character display (for example, the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A) and the second predetermined movable body provided at a position different from the first predetermined movable body and corresponding to the second character display. A movable body (for example, the rotating portion 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B) and a third predetermined movable body (for example, a third predetermined movable body provided at a position different from the first predetermined movable body and the second predetermined movable body and corresponding to the third character display). , A plurality of predetermined movable bodies including the rotating portion 038SG401C) of the character panel 038SG400C, and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a cut-in effect) and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect executing means is
After operating the first predetermined movable body, the first predetermined character display is moved and displayed in a direction away from the position corresponding to the first predetermined movable body (FIGS. 11-33 (A1) (A2). ), Fig. 11-35),
A second predetermined effect (FIGS. 11-33 (A3) (A4)) in which the second predetermined movable body is operated and then the second character display is moved and displayed in a direction away from the position corresponding to the second predetermined movable body. ), Fig. 11-35),
A third predetermined effect (FIGS. 11-33 (A5) (A6)) in which the third predetermined movable body is operated and then the third character display is moved and displayed in a direction away from the position corresponding to the third predetermined movable body. ), Fig. 11-35),
Is feasible,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by a plurality of predetermined effects in which the character display and the predetermined movable body are linked.

The gaming machine of the 18th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 17th embodiments.
The predetermined effect executing means can sequentially execute the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect, and the third predetermined effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used in the effect patterns CP-3 and CP-4. The part where the cut-in effect can be executed based on),
When the second predetermined effect is started when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the first predetermined effect, the operation of the first predetermined movable body is stopped (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a cut-in image. After finishing the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401A and the lighting of the character panel LED 038SG404A while displaying the 038SG601, the cut-in image 038SG602 is displayed on the front side of the cut-in image 038SG601 as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A3) (A4). The part that is displayed so that it overlaps with),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the second predetermined effect is started, the first predetermined movable body operated in the first predetermined effect is stopped, so that the second predetermined effect can be focused on.

The gaming machine of the form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 18.
The predetermined effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a decision effect) for notifying whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
After executing the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect, and the third predetermined effect, the notification effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 produces a cut-in effect in the effect part SP2-9. After execution, the part that executes the notification that the variable display result is a big hit or miss in the production part SP2-11),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the player's expectation before the notification effect.

The gaming machine of the 20th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 19th embodiments.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect as an effect suggesting that the predetermined effect is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
The case where the first predetermined effect is executed, the case where the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are executed, and the case where the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect, and the third predetermined effect are executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the execution case (for example, the jackpot expectation degree of the cut-in effect type is pattern CP-1, pattern CP-2, pattern CP-3, pattern CP-4. Higher in order (big hit expectation; pattern CP-1 <pattern CP-2 <pattern CP-3 <pattern CP-4), etc., see FIG. 11-9 (B)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, attention can be paid to the number of predetermined effects to be performed.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
The plurality of predetermined movable bodies include a fourth predetermined movable body (for example, a rotating portion 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D) corresponding to a fourth character display different from the third character display.
A first opening / closing member (for example, wing 038SG221) provided with the first predetermined movable body and the second predetermined movable body and capable of opening / closing operation.
A second opening / closing member (for example, wing 038SG321) provided with the third predetermined movable body and the fourth predetermined movable body and capable of opening / closing operation.
Equipped with
When the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are in the open state, the visibility of the plurality of predetermined movable bodies is higher than when the first opening / closing member is in the closed state (see FIGS. 11-10).
When the predetermined effect is executed, the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are opened (for example, a portion where the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are maintained in the open state during the execution period of the cut-in effect. FIG. 11-. 33),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the movement of each predetermined movable body rather than the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member.

The gaming machine of the 22nd form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 21st forms.
The first predetermined movable body (for example, the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A) and the first character display (for example, image A-1Z) have a common first color (for example, blue or the like), and the second. The predetermined movable body (for example, the rotating portion 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B) and the second character display (for example, image A-2Z) have a common second color (for example, yellow), and the third predetermined movable body. (For example, the rotating portion 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C) and the third character display (for example, image A-3Z) have a common third color (for example, green) (see FIG. 11-33 (B)). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the relationship between each predetermined movable body and each character display can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the embodiments 1 to 22.
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D) corresponding to each of the plurality of predetermined movable bodies are provided.
The plurality of light emitting means can be turned off when the corresponding predetermined movable body is in a non-operating state, and can be turned on when the corresponding predetermined movable body is in an operating state (see FIGS. 11-19 to 11-21). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, each predetermined movable body can be made to stand out by light emission.

The gaming machine of the 24th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 23rd embodiments.
The predetermined effect executing means can display the first corresponding display (for example, effect image 038SG611) corresponding to the movement display of the first character display (for example, image A-1Z) in the first predetermined effect. In the second predetermined effect, a second corresponding display (for example, effect image 038SG621) corresponding to the movement display of the second character display (for example, image A-2Z) can be displayed, and in the third predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect can be displayed. It is possible to display a third corresponding display (for example, effect image 038SG631) corresponding to the movement display of the third character display (for example, image A-3Z).
The first correspondence display, the second correspondence display, and the third correspondence display are
Each character display gradually widens toward the moving display direction,
The first character display, the second character display, and the third character display are displayed in a manner extending in a direction common to the moving display direction (see FIGS. 11-34).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the feeling of interlocking with a predetermined movable body can be suitably enhanced by the corresponding display corresponding to the movement display of each character display.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and the movable piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable piece is a winning ball. It is close to the device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is in the closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the movable piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting winning). It is also said that the mouth is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of an ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided to operate according to the effect. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning is generated, but is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time reduction" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power supply switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "off", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". Further, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical range is "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (A).

As shown in FIG. 7B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". Further, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical range is "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "missing time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are common. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values which can take the value in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio of the variable display result to be out of time is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Further, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-reduced deviation reference value, in any setting value, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as advance notice effects are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 038SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 038SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-38. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the feature unit 038SG, for example, the part described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "038SGS1", and "normal reach" is referred to as "N reach" or "super reach". May be abbreviated as "SP reach". Further, a configuration having the same function as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function will be designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine of the feature unit 038SG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 038SG has an opening / closing door frame 50 that is openably / closably attached to a gaming machine frame 3 to which the gaming board 2 on which the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are mounted is detachable. The first effect unit 038SG100 installed at the upper center position, the second effect unit 038SG 200 installed on the upper left side of the opening / closing door frame 50, and the third effect unit installed on the upper right side of the opening / closing door frame 50. It has three production units of 038SG300. The opening / closing door frame 50 includes a glass door frame 3a, and is a door frame capable of opening / closing the entire front surface of the gaming machine frame 3.

Further, in the lower center of the opening / closing door frame 50, there is an operation unit 600 provided with a chance button 631B at the upper part, a player can push and pull in the front-rear direction, and a lever body 631A provided so as to be rotatable. In addition to being provided, the upper plate portion is provided with a cross key constituting the selection button 038SG35 for setting the effect such as volume.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see FIG. 11-2) for detecting the player's operation (operation) with respect to the chance button 631B, and also detects the forward / backward movement of the lever body 631A. A push-pull sensor 625Y including a push sensor 625 (not shown) and a pull sensor (not shown), and a protrusion position sensor 625C for detecting that the lever body 631A is located at the protrusion position are provided. There is. Further, the selection button 038SG35 has an up / down / left / right sensor 038SG36 (see FIG. 11-2) including an upper sensor, a lower sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor for detecting each operation of the cross key of the selection button 038SG35 in the up / down / left / right directions. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the first effect unit 038SG100 has a relatively high voltage DC power for generating drive power for operating the drive motor 038SG102 in each effect unit 038SG100 to 038SG300. The VSL as the primary power source is supplied from the power supply board.

The detection signals of the origin position sensor and the effect position sensor provided in the first effect unit 038SG100, the second effect unit 038SG200, and the third effect unit 038SG300, and the push-pull sensor of the operation unit 600 provided in the opening / closing door frame 50. The detection signals of the 625Y, the protrusion position sensor 625C, the button sensor 635B, and the up / down / left / right sensors 038SG36 of the selection button 038SG35 are serials provided on the relay boards (not shown) of the production units 038SG100 to 038SG300 and the opening / closing door frame 50. By being converted into a serial signal of 1 by the signal conversion circuits A to E and input to the effect control CPU 120, the effect control CPU 120 that controls the effect can grasp the detection status of each sensor. ..

The first effect unit 038SG100 is provided with an elevating body 038SG121 that can be moved between the origin position and the effect position by the drive means provided in the first effect unit 038SG100. Further, the second effect unit 038SG200 and the third effect unit 038SG300 are wing 038SG221 as a movable body (opening / closing body) attached to the opening / closing door frame 50 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction about a rotation axis facing in the vertical direction. It includes 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D as movable bodies (rotating bodies) rotatably provided on the inner side surfaces thereof. Each effect unit is provided with a drive motor for driving these movable bodies, an origin position sensor, an effect position sensor, a frame LED, etc. for detecting that the movable body is located at the origin position or the effect position. (See Fig. 11-2).

A first reserved storage display area 038SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 038SG005U are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved storage display area 038SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 038SG005U, the reserved storage display for identifiablely displaying the reserved number (special figure reserved storage number) of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol is performed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) Generates based on the starting prize. That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is satisfied, the variable display based on the previously established start condition is being executed or the pachinko gaming machine. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display is not satisfied because 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state or the like, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. The hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 038SG005D is a hold storage display generated based on the start winning by passing (entering) the game ball through the first start winning opening, and is in the second hold storage display area 038SG005U. The hold memory display is a hold memory display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) through the second start prize opening.

In the feature unit 038SG, the hold storage display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening is displayed in a round white display (first hold storage display area 038SG005D). Hold storage display), and the hold storage display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening is displayed in a round white display (second hold storage display area 038SG005U). Hold memory display). In addition, based on the hold memory display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, and the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the second starting winning opening. The display mode of the hold storage display generated in the above may be different from the display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1, the number of special symbol reserved storages is placed on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first reserved storage display area 038SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 038SG005U. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided to display the above identifiable. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The second hold display 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The first special figure reservation storage number is the storage number in which the execution of the variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reserved storage number is the number of storages in which the execution of the variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure holding memory number" usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure holding storage number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number, but in particular, a part of these (for example, for example). It may also refer to the concept of including the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding storage number but excluding the total holding storage number).

On the right side of the winning ball device 6A, a special variable winning ball unit 038SG007 in which the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B and the variable winning ball device 6B are integrated is provided. ..

As shown in FIG. 11-1, the special variable winning ball unit 038SG007 constitutes the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A on the left side and the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B on the right side. Further, a cover body (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 038SG007, and the player can use the special variable winning ball unit via the cover body. It is possible to visually recognize the game ball flowing down in 038SG007, particularly in the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B.

The first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A includes a first special winning opening door 038SG701 driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 038SG082 (see FIG. 11-2), and is opened and closed by the first special winning opening door 038SG701. Form a changing first prize opening. The first large winning opening is formed so as to open upward at the left portion of the special variable winning ball unit 038SG007. The first prize-winning door 038SG701 can slide and move in the front-rear direction between the closed position where the first prize-winning door is closed by driving the solenoid 038SG082 and the open position where the first prize-winning door is opened. ing.

In the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the first large winning opening door 038SG701 opens the first large winning opening, and the game ball passes through (entering) the first large winning opening. Make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the first large winning opening door 038SG701 closes the first large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the first large winning opening. In this way, the first large winning opening changes into an open state that is advantageous for the player who can easily pass (enter) the game ball, and a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player because the game ball cannot pass (enter). In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the first prize opening. You may.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first prize-winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23 by passing through the first count switch 23 (see FIG. 11-2) provided in the first prize-winning opening. Will be done. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 23 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the first large winning opening opened in the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the first large winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, the game ball can enter the first large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the first big prize opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, it is impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the first big winning opening and obtain the prize ball. This is a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, most of the game balls flowing down the second path on the right side of the image display device 5 in the game area are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by an obstacle nail or the like (not shown), and the variable winning ball device 6B is in the expanded open state. If so, it is designed to win a prize in the second start winning opening.

The second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B is formed so as to project upward from the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, and is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 11-2). A door 038SG711 is provided, and a second large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state is formed by the second large winning opening door 038SG711. The second large winning opening is formed so as to open upward at the upper end portion of the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B. The second big winning opening door 038SG711 is between the first state (open state) in which the second big winning opening is opened by driving the solenoid 83 and the second state (closed state) in which the second big winning opening is closed. It is provided so that it can slide in the front-back direction.

In the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, when the solenoid 83 for the second big winning door 038SG711 is on, the second big winning door 038SG711 sets the second big winning door open, and the game ball is the second. Make it easier to pass (enter) through the two major winning openings. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the 2nd big prize opening door 038SG711 is in the off state, the 2nd big winning opening door 038SG711 closes the 2nd big winning opening and the game ball passes through the 2nd big winning opening. Make it impossible to (enter). In this way, the second major winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the second prize opening. You may.

The game ball passing through (entering) the second special winning opening is detected by the second count switch 24A by passing through the second count switch 24A installed in the second special winning opening. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 24A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening opened in the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, other ordinary winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are used. More prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) the mouth. Therefore, if the second special winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second big winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, it is impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the second big winning opening and obtain the winning ball. This is a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, a game ball flow path through which the game ball passing through the second large winning opening can flow down is formed. In the game ball flow path, a third count switch 24B that can further detect the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 24A is installed. The game ball that has passed through the third count switch 24B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Further, the game ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the branch path is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and passes through the fourth count switch 24C. It is detected by the fourth count switch 24C.

It should be noted that, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch 24B during the small hit game described later, the feature unit 038SG controls the game state after the small hit game to the big hit game state. There is.

The passing gate 41 in the feature unit 038SG is installed above the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 038SG007.

In the feature unit 038SG, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side and a right game area on the right side of the center decorative frame surrounding the image display device 5 arranged at a substantially central position of the game area. , The game ball that is weakly launched by the hitting operation handle (left-handed) flows down the left game area (first path), and the game ball that is strongly launched by the hitting operation handle (right-handed) is in the right game area (right-handed). The second route) is designed to flow down.

Further, the game ball flowing down the left game area can win a prize in the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area can win the variable winning ball device 6B, the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A, and the second special variable. A large number of obstacle nails are arranged so that the winning ball device 038SG007B can win a prize and can pass through the passing gate 41. That is, in the case of a left-handed hit, the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B cannot be won, and the passing gate 41 cannot be passed.

(Configuration of display control unit 123)
As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, and the like. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates according to the program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives the effect control command via the input circuit 260. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control of the image display device 5 such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 on the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 based on the effect control command. Perform the processing to make it.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the display control unit 123 has characters as image element data used as sprite images (for example, ally characters A-1 to A-4, enemy characters X-1, X-2, etc., which will be described later). ), Decorative symbols, background images, first special figure holding storage number as identifiable information, first holding storage display area 038SG005D, and second special figure holding storage number to be identifiable. Display control together with CGROM205 for storing data such as a first interface image for displaying the storage display area 038SG005U and a second interface image including a small symbol, and SDRAM210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the circuit.

The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received effect control command to the display control unit 123. The CGROM 205 previously stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns), and background image image data. It is a ROM for storing. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. Then, the display control unit 123 executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, attributes (parameters used when drawing a character, the drawing order of the character, the number of colors, the enlargement / reduction ratio, and the like. Attribute register 203 that stores (data that specifies palette numbers, coordinates, etc.), drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images in the drawing area of the VRAM area, and CG data stored in the CGROM 205 are transferred to the VRAM area. Data transfer control unit 211 to control, display of VRAM area Video signal (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) signal and synchronization signal for displaying image data stored in the image creation area This is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs data, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the data to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 201C. Further, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via the CG bus interface 204. The system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and the attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus so that the system register 202 can be accessed. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus so that the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203 can be accessed.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via the VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus so that the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system register 202 includes a system control register that stores instructions such as initial setting, drawing, and data transfer, an interrupt control register that stores interrupt signal output commands, a drawing area in the VRAM area, a palette data arrangement area, and the like. A drawing register for storing data, a data transfer register for storing a transfer source address and a transfer destination address at the time of data transfer, a display register for storing a display image creation area in the VRAM area, and the like are assigned.

The CPU interface 201C outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the effect control CPU 120 at each start of the V blank (cycle for updating the image), and outputs various other interrupt signals to the effect control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In the feature unit 038SG, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area allocated as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. In the meantime, drawing is performed in the other area.

In the feature unit 038SG, for example, an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is generated by superimposing (combining) a plurality of layers. In the VRAM area, a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each of these layers and an image drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (combined) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image for the purpose is arranged. It should be noted that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and the higher the image, the higher the display priority is set in the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the higher the display priority in the image display device 5. Is set low.

In the VRAM area, a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing / arranging a layer 1 image, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing / arranging a layer 2 image, and a layer for drawing / arranging a layer 3 image. 3 Image drawing areas are arranged. Further, a display image creation area for creating a display image is arranged in the VRAM area.

In the display image creation area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed ( This is an area created as a display image (display data) for displaying the combined image on the image display device 5.

The image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image having the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is an image display. An image having a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are the most in the image display device 5. Each image has a low display priority (display priority: low). That is, layer 1 is an upper layer having the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer having an image display priority lower than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer having the lowest image display priority. It is a layer.

For example, in the layer 1 image drawing area, the first reserved storage display area 038SG005D and the second special figure reserved storage number for identifiablely displaying the first special figure reserved storage number are specified in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. To display a first interface image including a second reserved storage display area 038SG005U to be displayed as possible, and a second interface image including a small symbol whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbol at the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5. It is a drawing area for drawing these images. The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the left, middle, and right decorative patterns in order to execute variable display of the decorative patterns in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the background image in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

An image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area. By superimposing each of the images (images of layer 3), it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In particular, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image or second interface image) is set to have the highest display priority, so that it is displayed as the uppermost image in the image display device 5. Since the image (decorative pattern) drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, it is displayed as a middle layer image in the image display device 5. Since the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, it is displayed as a low-layer image on the image display device 5.

The transparency of the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area is set to 0% in order to make the overlapping portion of the lower layer image invisible to the player when the upper layer image is superimposed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency of the image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area is set to be higher than 0% depending on the situation, and the display area of the image display device 5 is used. An image that is transparently displayed or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Further, the display control unit 123 generates image data (display data) for displaying the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area, and generates the image data (display data) in the display image creation area. As control information for a movable body for operating a movable body such as the wing 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating portion 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D when performing a display process for outputting image data (display data) as a video signal. Extended commands (for example, extended commands D033, D036, D008, etc., which will be described later) and extended commands as lamp control information for turning on / off the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D (for example, extended commands BXXX, etc. (“X” is)). Arbitrary number)) is generated and transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

Based on the reception of the extended commands D033, D036, and D008, the effect control CPU 120 has operation control based on the operation control execution data of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG322 and the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D described in the process data described later. Separately starts the operation control to operate the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the wing 038SG221, 038SG322 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the operation pattern corresponding to the extended commands D033, D036, D008.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command BXXX and the like, and is independent of the control based on the lamp control execution data of the character panels LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D described in the process data described later, the extended command BXXX. The control to turn on / off the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D is started in the lighting pattern corresponding to the above.

Further, the control data for operating the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG322 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are stored in the ROM 121.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 038SG will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 displays a variable display of the normal symbol, such as the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 11-2. After the normal map start condition for execution is satisfied, it is normal based on the fact that the normal map start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, the variable display of the previous normal map is completed. The variable display of the normal figure by the symbol display 20 is started.

In this variable display of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time that is the variable display time of the normal symbol elapses after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the confirmed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display). .. At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "out of normal symbol". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal", expansion / opening control (opening control) is performed in which the movable piece of the electric tulip constituting the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilting position. Normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 11-2. For example, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 11-2. After that, the variable display of the special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special figure or the end of the big hit game state. ..

In the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, when the variable display time as the special symbol variable display time elapses after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the special symbol is displayed. Derived display of the definite special symbol (variable display result) that is the variable display result of. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is "missing".

After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also called "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. To. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 038SG, as an example, a special symbol showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a big hit symbol, and a special symbol showing the number "2" is used as a small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol of "-" is regarded as an off symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a missed symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be a symbol, or the common special symbol in the variable display of both special symbols may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special figure and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit game state, the first big winning opening door of the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A. The 038SG701 opens the first large winning opening in the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" or "10"). Even before the number of rounds to be executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win in the first big winning opening). May be good.

Further, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "small hit" as a specific display result, in the small hit game state, the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B is used. The 2nd big winning opening door 038SG711 opens the 2nd big winning opening in the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Make it a state. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B becomes the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

In the feature unit 038SG, the second big winning opening door 038SG711 is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit game state. It is not limited to, and may be opened a plurality of times in the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, when the game ball winning in the second large winning opening passes through the third count switch 24B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B, the third count switch 24B of the game ball passes. It becomes a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 24B of the gaming ball.

In the feature unit 038SG, the game ball that has won the second prize opening always passes through the third count switch 24B. That is, when a game ball wins a prize in the second big winning opening in the small hit game state, the winning game ball is always detected by the third count switch 24B, and after the small hit game is completed, the CPU 103 controls the game to the big hit game state. Will be done. In this feature unit 038SG, when the variable display result is a small hit, the game ball wins a prize in the second big winning opening during the small hit game, so that the game is always controlled to the big hit game state after the small hit game is completed. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 24B of the game ball, the second big prize opening door 038SG711 of the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B has a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) Elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated, and the second large winning opening is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. In the feature unit 038SG, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 24B, the second special variable winning ball device 038SG007B is controlled to the first state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 038SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "9"). Even before the number of times the round game is executed reaches the upper limit, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win in the second major winning opening). good.

After the end of the jackpot gaming state in the feature unit 038SG, the time saving control (time saving control) is performed within a predetermined variable display number range (for example, 99 times, 7 times, 3 times, 1 time). And the normal state where the time reduction control is not performed. By performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (variable display time of the special figure) in the variable display of the special figure is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control as in the executed state) is performed. In the time saving control, the variable display of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit game state, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game ball presses the third count switch 24B in the small hit game state. It suffices to end when one of the conditions of passing is satisfied first.

When the time reduction control is performed, the variable display time (special symbol variable display time) in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be shorter than in the normal state. , The control to shorten the variable display time (variable display time of the normal figure) of the variable display of the normal figure by the normal symbol display 20 is shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the variable display of the normal figure each time is "normal". The control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, and the open control time to control the opening of the movable piece in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "hit the normal figure" are normal. There is a possibility that the second start condition will be satisfied by making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than in the state and control to increase the number of tilts compared to the normal state. The control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the value. As described above, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being opened is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the variable display of the special figure can be executed frequently. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed. The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

FIG. 11-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 038SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating a variable display start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the variable display start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variable display time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data are set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B".

In the feature unit 038SG, by providing the fifth variable display result designation command and the sixth variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 notifies the effect control CPU 120 of the small hit type in advance before the start of the variable display. Although the possible forms are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result specification command is that the CPU 103 has a variable display result of "small hit" with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Only may be notified in advance before the start of the variable display.

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the variable display stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), as a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed. The command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed. The command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure three times after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed. The command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which the time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the jackpot game of the jackpot C is completed. The command 9504H is a fifth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure seven times after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed. The command 9505H is a sixth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the large winning opening that notifies that the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the first hold storage display area 038SG005D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the second hold storage display area 038SG005U or the like. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH is a symbol designation command for designating a winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

The command D100H is a V prize notification designation command for notifying that the V prize has been won, that is, the third count switch 24B has been turned on by the game ball passing through the third count switch 24B. The command D2XXH is a command for notifying the remaining time reduction control number of the second special symbol in the time reduction state. The command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (given) by the game ball winning a prize in the winning opening.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in the feature unit 038SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

FIG. 11-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 038SG. In this feature unit 038SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" and a case where the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), the feature unit 038SG is provided with a plurality of different fluctuation patterns in advance according to the special symbol for executing the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and super reach α and super reach. There is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as β is executed. Although the feature unit 038SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), among the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol in the feature unit 038SG, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is the super reach fluctuation. It is set shorter than the patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β. Further, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this feature unit 038SG, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is executed. Is set to have a longer special figure variable display time than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this feature unit 038SG, as described above, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation are set because the jackpot expectation that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach is set high. In the pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation (big hit expectation; super reach β> super reach α> normal reach).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the feature unit 038SG is a non-reach variation having a special symbol variable display time different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Patterns and reach variation patterns are provided.

In this feature unit 038SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined as the type of fluctuation pattern, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-7 and the like, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), and FIG. 11-7 ( In addition to the big hit type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in C) and the small hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 11-7 (D), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table ( Includes an out-of-figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 11-7 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (value set by the CPU 103 at the time of executing the special symbol normal processing as a value for designating the special symbol for executing the variable display) is 1 (first), that is, For each of the case where the first special symbol is the target of variable display and the case where the variable display special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, the second special symbol is the target of variable display. , A judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, only the big hit can be won, and the small hit is not won.

Further, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as in the case where the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second. Even when the special symbol is targeted for variable display, a big hit occurs with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and about 1/7 of these judgment values are small. Since it is set as a judgment value corresponding to a hit, when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, a small hit is won with a probability (ratio) of about 1/7. There is.

That is, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (big hit A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. The "probability" shown in FIG. 11-7 (A) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but whether or not the stop symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is to be a small hit symbol. It also means deciding whether or not.

In the feature unit 038SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A) to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. A small hit judgment table is provided separately, and the big hit judgment is a common table for the case where the first special symbol is variable display and the case where the second special symbol is variable display regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer. The small hit may be determined using a separate table only when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in this feature unit 038SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, a judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it was designed not to win, a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit so that the small hit may be won.

11-7 (B) and 11-7 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-7 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 11-7 (C) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine. In this feature unit 038SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (B) and 11-7 (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) is provided with two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B. On the other hand, the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) is provided with only one type of jackpot C. That is, the jackpot that occurs when the first special symbol is variablely displayed is one of two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while when the second special symbol is variablely displayed. Only jackpot C is the jackpot that occurs.

FIG. 11-7 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type. It is a table referenced to determine. In this feature unit 038SG, when the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type D is executed. When the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type E is executed. It is supposed to be done. That is, these jackpot D and jackpot E are not the jackpot type determined by the random value MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball during the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. Is a jackpot type determined by passing through the third count switch 24B.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 038SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-7 (E). In the feature unit 038SG, the jackpot A in which the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state as the jackpot type. ~ Jackpot E is set.

Of these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which the first jackpot is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot A, one time reduction control is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol.

The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to the second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, the big hit is again until the special figure game is executed three times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the special figure game is executed three times. Time reduction control is executed until.

The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to the second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, the big hit is again until the special figure game is executed 99 times or the special figure game is executed 99 times for the variable display of the second special symbol. Time reduction control is executed until.

The jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called 9 rounds) in which the second big prize opening is changed to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit D, the big hit is again until the special figure game is executed 7 times or the special figure game is executed 7 times for the variable display of the second special symbol. Time reduction control is executed until.

The jackpot E is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called 9 rounds) in which the second big prize opening is changed to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, the big hit is again until the special figure game is executed 99 times or the special figure game is executed 99 times for the variable display of the second special symbol. Time reduction control is executed until.

It should be noted that, in the time-saving state, the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times in the time saving state and immediately after the time saving state ends, a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the game ball is in a small hit game. Since a big hit may be generated by winning a V prize, a so-called consecutive villa state in which a big hit game state is likely to occur continuously is obtained.

In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed, since the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to one time, the variable display of the second special symbol once and the one time The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the variable display of the second special symbol of 2 The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of a special symbol and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs) is set to about 54%.

Further, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 3 times, so that the 3 times variable display of the 2nd special symbol and the 3 times The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the variable display of the second special symbol of 2 The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of a special symbol and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs) is set to about 66%.

Further, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 7 times, so that the 7 times variable display of the second special symbol and the 7 times are performed. The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the variable display of the second special symbol (11 times in total). 2 The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of a special symbol and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs) is set to about 82%.

Then, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 99 times, so that the variable display of the second special symbol of the 99 times and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed. The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the 99 times variable display of the second special symbol (total 103 above). The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol of the times) is set to almost 100%.

The feature unit 038SG is provided with five types of big hits A to E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more types of big hits may be provided. Further, four or less types may be provided.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". A variation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a variation pattern determination table for misses used when it is pre-determined to make the variable display result "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In particular, the variation pattern determination table for jackpots based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variation pattern determination table selected when the gaming state is the normal state, and is a variation pattern of normal reach jackpots (PB1-1). For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), a predetermined disturbance within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A jackpot variation pattern determination table A to which a numerical value is assigned as a determination value is provided. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, when the jackpot type is "big hit B", the super reach β is easily determined, and when the jackpot type is "big hit A". Is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that it will be a “big hit B”. ..

Further, the variation pattern determination table for jackpots based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variation pattern determination table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state, and is a variation pattern of non-reach jackpots (PB1-4). ), There is provided a jackpot variation pattern determination table B in which all random values in the range that the variation pattern determination random value MR3 can take are assigned as determination values.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the deviation variation selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is one or less. The pattern determination table A, the deviation pattern determination table B selected when the game state is the normal state and the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is 3 or more, and the game state is the time saving state. The deviation pattern determination table C selected for is prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β. Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol being 3 or more, and the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2) PA2-1), fluctuation pattern out of super reach α (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern out of super reach β (PA2-3), a predetermined disturbance within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value. Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for deviation, all of the range that the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA1-3) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time reduction control. A random number value is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), the variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. Therefore, when the number of reserved storages increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved storages are easily digested, and the number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start when the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start-up prize that is not stored on hold to occur. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes long, and it becomes possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3) selected during the time reduction control is more variable than the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The time is short. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the time reduction control, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time reduction control is not executed (when the gaming state is the normal state). Since the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PA1-3), it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered due to the variable display of the second special symbol not being started during the time reduction control.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area shown in FIG. 11-7 includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, and a game control timer setting. It includes a unit, a game control counter setting unit, and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. It is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Numerical data indicating random numbers, for example, random numbers MR1 to MR4, which are not generated by the random number circuit 104, are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. There is.

As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 has various effect devices (for example, an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LED, movable body 32, wing 038SG221, 038SG322, character panel 038SG400A to An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns used for controlling the effect operation by the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the 038SG400D, the chance button 631B, the lever body 631A, etc.) is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content or the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, an effect control pattern at the time of variable display of a special figure, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

The effect control pattern at the time of special symbol variable display corresponds to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, and is the period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the definite special symbol that is the special symbol display result. From data showing the control contents of various effects such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach effect, effect display operation in re-lottery effect, or various effect display operations without variable display of decorative symbols. It is configured. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect to be executed corresponding to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The special figure variable display effect control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different for each variable pattern for executing the reach effect.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-2 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 038SG, the data constituting the start winning command receive command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the number of pending storages. Three commands called a notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer issue these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, and hold storage number notification commands. In association with each other, a storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative pattern fluctuation stop processing executed when the process is finished.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of the start winning. At the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, and the hold storage count notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command receive command buffer is an entry (buffer number "1-0" or "2-" corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. What is stored in the entry of "0") is deleted, and is stored in the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1"). The stored content of the entry after the hold storage of the variable display to be started is shifted from that of the entry. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and stored in the buffer number "1". Each command is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1", and the buffer number is "3". , Each command stored in the area corresponding to each of "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In this feature unit 038SG, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are received, and these are determined. If commands have been received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the free area of the start winning command buffer at the time of winning as a hold memory of each special figure.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 038SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 038SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted higher by one buffer number (step 038SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 038SGS271 (step 038SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 038SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 038SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 038SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of start winning, for one buffer number. It shifts to the upper side one by one (step 038SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 038SGS272 or step 038SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (step 038SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 038SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 038SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols as even symbols as stop symbols. A combination of decorative symbols aligned with (for example, a combination of decorative symbols such as "222", "444", "666", and "888") is determined. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the combination of the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are aligned with the "7" symbol is determined as the stop symbol. .. If the received variable display result specification command is the 5th variable display result specification command corresponding to the small hit A or the 6th variable display result specification command corresponding to the small hit B, the stop symbol is a chance. It is decided from among "334", "778" and the like. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. Determine (missing symbol).

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is the super reach fluctuation pattern of the super reach β (step 038SGS277), and when it is not the super reach fluctuation pattern of the super reach β (step 038SGS277). N), the process proceeds to step 038SGS283. Further, when it is the super reach fluctuation pattern of the super reach β (step 038SGS277; Y), after executing the cut-in effect type determination process described later (step 038SGS278), the process proceeds to step 038SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, in the cut-in effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 038SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (missing, big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, small hit A, small hit B, missing) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for effect determination (for example, 1 to 100), and whether or not to execute the cut-in effect using the cut-in effect type determination table shown in FIG. 11-9 (B). When the execution is decided, the cut-in effect type is decided (step 038SGS302).

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), in the cut-in effect type determination table, when the variable display results are jackpot B, jackpot A, and missed, non-execution, patterns CP-1, CP-2, CP-3. , The number of judgment values assigned to CP-4 is different. Specifically, when the variable display result is jackpot B, 5 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern CP-1, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern CP-2. Is assigned, 30 determination values are assigned to the pattern CP-3, and 40 determination values are assigned to the pattern CP-4. When the variable display result is the jackpot A, 5 judgment values are assigned to the non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern CP-1, and 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern CP-2. , 40 determination values are assigned to the pattern CP-3, and 30 determination values are assigned to the pattern CP-4. If the variable display result is out of order, 40 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 30 judgment values are assigned to pattern CP-1, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern CP-2. Ten determination values are assigned to the pattern CP-3, and five determination values are assigned to the pattern CP-4.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big hit B or a big hit A, the patterns CP-3 and CP-4 are determined at a higher rate than in the case of a loss, but the variable display result is a loss. In, the non-execution and the patterns CP-1 and CP-2 are determined at a higher rate than in the case of the jackpot B or the jackpot A, so that the player executes the cut-in effect and the patterns CP-3 and CP. You will expect the cut-in effect based on -4 to be executed. Further, when the variable display result is the jackpot B, the pattern CP-4 is determined at a higher rate than when the jackpot A has a lower advantage than the jackpot B (the number of time reduction controls is smaller). It is expected that the cut-in effect based on the pattern CP-4 will be executed.

That is, the jackpot expectation of the cut-in effect type is higher in the order of pattern CP-1, pattern CP-2, pattern CP-3, and pattern CP-4 (big hit expectation; pattern CP-1 <pattern CP-. 2 <Pattern CP-3 <Pattern CP-4).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the execution of the cut-in effect is decided (step 038SGS303), and if the execution is not decided (step 038SGS303; N), the process is terminated as it is. When the execution is determined (step 038SGS303; Y), the cut-in effect type determined in step 038SGS302 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 038SGS304). Then, a period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the cut-in effect (step 038SGS305), and the process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 11-8, in step 038SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 038SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. Sound control execution data, operation control execution data for controlling the operation of movable bodies such as movable body 32, wing 038SG221, 038SG321, and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, and chance button 631B and lever body 631A. The operation unit control execution data and the like for controlling the operation are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, operation control execution data, and operation unit control execution data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern. In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the slip effect. You may.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect device (the display control execution data 1, the lamp control execution data 1, the sound control execution data 1, the operation control execution data 1, the operation unit control execution data 1, etc.) according to the contents of the process data 1. Image display device 5 as a production part, various lamps as a production part, speakers 8L, 8R as a production part, movable body (movable body 32, wing 038SG221, 038SG321, rotating part 038SG401A to 038SG401D), operation unit ( (Chance button 631B, lever body 631A, etc.)) is controlled (step 038SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13. Further, in order to operate the movable body (movable body 32, wing 038SG221, 038SG321, rotating unit 038SG401A to 038SG401D) and the operation unit (chance button 631B, lever body 631A, etc.), a control signal (operation control execution) is performed for the drive circuit. Data) is output.

In the feature unit 038SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 038SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 038SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data during variable display including the image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 038SGS288).

(Direction unit)
Next, the first effect unit 038SG100, the second effect unit 038SG200, and the third effect unit 038SG300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-11. 11-10 is a front view showing a state in which the movable body of each effect unit is located at the origin position, and FIG. 11-10 is a front view showing an opening / closing door frame in a state where the movable body of each effect unit is located at the effect position. 11-11 are plan views showing a state in which the movable body of each effect unit is located at the origin position, and FIG. 11-11 is a plan view showing an opening / closing door frame in a state where the movable body of each effect unit is located at the effect position.

(1st production unit 038SG100)
As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, the first effect unit 038SG100 includes a plate-shaped base member 038SG120 provided so as to project from the upper side portion of the opening / closing door frame 50 toward the front and upper sides, and a base member. It has an elevating body 038SG121 provided on the front surface side of the 038SG120 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The elevating body 038SG121 is provided so that the player can come into contact with the elevating body 038SG121 in the closed state of the door portion. The elevating body 038SG121 of the first effect unit 038SG100 is larger and heavier than the wing 038SG221 of the second effect unit 038SG200 and the wing 038SG321 of the third effect unit 038SG300, which will be described later.

The elevating body 038SG121 is attached to the front surface of the plate-shaped movable base portion 038SG121A arranged on the front side of the base member 038SG120 and the movable base portion 038SG121A, and is displayed in various effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (illustration). The second decorative part 038SG122L, 038SG122R, which is operably provided between the movable base part 038SG121A and the first decorative part 038SG121B and has a shape imitating a character's wings. , Consists of.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the first effect unit 038SG100 has a drive motor 038SG102 for operating the elevating body 038SG121 and a power transmission mechanism for a movable body for transmitting the power of the drive motor 038SG102 to the elevating body 038SG121 (not shown). ), The origin position sensor 038SG103A for detecting that the elevating body 038SG121 is located at the origin position, and the effect position sensor 038SG103B for detecting that the elevating body 038SG121 is located at the effect position. 1 The effect LED 038SG104A for emitting light of the light emitting unit 038SG104 provided on the front surface of the decorative unit 038SG121B, the drive motor 038SG132 for operating the second decorative unit 038SG122L, 038SG122R, and the left and right second decorations for the power of the drive motor 038SG132. The power transmission mechanism for the decorative part (not shown) that transmits to the parts 038SG122L and 038SG122R, the origin position sensor 038SG133A for detecting that the second decorative part 038SG122L and 038SG122R are located at the origin position, and the second decorative part. It has an effect position sensor 038SG133B for detecting that the 038SG122L and 038SG122R are located at the effect position, and an effect LED 038SG134A for causing the front light emitting portion of the second decorative portion 038SG122L and 038SG122R to emit light.

In this way, the elevating body 038SG121 can move in the vertical direction between the origin position shown in FIG. 11-10 (A) and the effect position shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) in the upper part of the front surface of the opening / closing door frame 50. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (A), the second decorative portion 038SG122L, 038SG122R is housed at the origin position on the left and right sides of the back surface of the first decorative portion 038SG121B, and FIG. 11-10 ( As shown in B), the second decorative portion 038SG122L and 038SG122R can be changed to a deployment mode in which the second decorative portion 038SG122L and 038SG122R project so as to expand to the upper left and right side of the back surface of the first decorative portion 038SG121B.

The power transmission mechanism for a movable body (not shown) is capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 038SG102 to the elevating body 038SG121 by power transmission members such as a plurality of gear members. Although not particularly shown, among a plurality of gear members, the first gear member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 038SG102 and the second gear member meshing with the first gear member are worm gears, and the second gear is also used. A clutch mechanism is provided between the member and the third gear member that meshes with the second gear member. Therefore, for example, an external force is applied to the elevating body 038SG121 for some reason (for example, a player or the like comes into contact with the elevating body 038SG121 or is moved by hand), and the external force is applied to the elevating body 038SG121 via a plurality of gear members. Even if it is transmitted to the side, the second gear member does not rotate due to the worm gear, and the external force is not transmitted to the drive motor 038SG102 due to the third gear member idling due to the clutch mechanism, so that the drive motor 038SG102 fails. And damage to the gear members are prevented.

On the other hand, although not particularly shown, the power transmission mechanism for the decorative portion (not shown) is a first gear member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 038SG132 and meshes with the first gear member among a plurality of gear members. The two-gear member is a worm gear, and a clutch mechanism is provided between the second gear member and the third gear member that meshes with the second gear member. Therefore, for example, an external force is applied to the second decorative portion 038SG122L, 038SG122R for some reason (for example, a player or the like comes into contact with the second decorative portion 038SG122L, 038SG122R, or is moved by hand), and the external force is plural. Even if it is transmitted to the drive motor 038SG132 side via the gear member, the second gear member does not rotate due to the worm gear, and the third gear member idles due to the clutch mechanism, so that the external force is transmitted to the drive motor 038SG132. Therefore, failure of the drive motor 038SG132 and damage to the gear member are prevented.

(2nd production unit 038SG200)
As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, the second effect unit 038SG200 can rotate about a rotation axis facing in the vertical direction with respect to the base portion composed of the left side portion of the opening / closing door frame 50. The plate-shaped wing 038SG221 provided in the wing 038SG221 and the character panels 038SG400A and 038SG400C provided at the upper and lower positions of the inner surface of the wing 038SG221 are provided, and the wing 038SG221 and the character panels 038SG400A and 038SG400C are provided so that the player can contact them. There is.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the second production unit 038SG200 includes a drive motor 038SG202 for operating the wing 038SG221 and a power transmission mechanism for a movable body (not shown) that transmits the power of the drive motor 038SG202 to the wing 038SG221. , The origin position sensor 038SG203A for detecting that the wing 038SG221 is located at the origin position, the effect position sensor 038SG203B for detecting that the wing 038SG221 is located at the effect position, and the rotating portion 038SG401A described later. , The drive motors 038SG402A and 038SG402C for operating the 038SG401C, and the character panel LEDs 038SG404A and 038SG404C for causing the rotating portions 038SG401A and 038SG401C to emit light.

The wing 038SG221 has an origin position (see FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-11 (A)) protruding forward so as to be inclined toward the glass window 50W, and is inclined toward the opposite side of the glass window 50W. It is possible to rotate in the left-right direction around a rotation axis (not shown) that faces up and down between the effect position protruding forward (see FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-11 (B)). It is provided.

The power transmission mechanism for a movable body (not shown) is capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 038SG202 to the wing 038SG221 by power transmission members such as a plurality of gear members. Although not particularly shown, among a plurality of gear members, the first gear member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 038SG202 and the second gear member meshing with the first gear member are worm gears, and the second gear is also used. A clutch mechanism is provided between the member and the third gear member that meshes with the second gear member. Therefore, for example, an external force is applied to the wing 038SG221 for some reason (for example, a player touches the wing 038SG221 or moves it by hand), and the external force is applied to the drive motor 038SG202 side via a plurality of gear members. Even if it is transmitted, the second gear member does not rotate due to the worm gear, and the external force is not transmitted to the drive motor 038SG202 due to the third gear member idling due to the clutch mechanism. Damage to the members is prevented.

(Third production unit 038SG300)
As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, the third effect unit 038SG300 has a plate-like shape provided so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction with respect to the base portion formed by the right side portion of the opening / closing door frame 50. The wing 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400B and 038SG400D provided at the upper and lower positions on the inner surface of the wing 038SG321 are provided, and the wing 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400B and 038SG400D are provided so that the player can contact them.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the third effect unit 038SG300 includes a drive motor 038SG302 for operating the wing 038SG321 and a power transmission mechanism for a movable body (not shown) that transmits the power of the drive motor 038SG302 to the wing 038SG321. , The origin position sensor 038SG303A for detecting that the wing 038SG321 is located at the origin position, the effect position sensor 038SG303B for detecting that the wing 038SG321 is located at the effect position, and the rotating portion 038SG401B described later. , 038SG402B, 038SG402D for operating the 038SG401D, and the character panel LEDs 038SG404B, 038SG404D for causing the character panels 038SG400B, 038SG400D to emit light.

Wing 038SG321 has an origin position (see FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-11 (A)) that protrudes forward so as to incline toward the glass window 50W, and tilts toward the opposite side to the glass window 50W. It is possible to rotate in the left-right direction around a rotation axis (not shown) that faces up and down between the effect position protruding forward (see FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-11 (B)). It is provided.

The power transmission mechanism for a movable body (not shown) is capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 038SG302 to the wing 038SG321 by a power transmission member such as a plurality of gear members. Although not particularly shown, among a plurality of gear members, the first gear member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 038SG302 and the second gear member meshing with the first gear member are worm gears, and the second gear is also used. A clutch mechanism is provided between the member and the third gear member that meshes with the second gear member. Therefore, for example, an external force is applied to the wing 038SG321 for some reason (for example, a player touches the wing 038SG321 or moves it by hand), and the external force is applied to the drive motor 038SG302 side via a plurality of gear members. Even if it is transmitted, the second gear member does not rotate due to the worm gear, and the external force is not transmitted to the drive motor 038SG302 due to the third gear member idling due to the clutch mechanism. Therefore, the drive motor 038SG302 fails or the gear is transmitted. Damage to the members is prevented.

The left and right wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 configured in this way can be individually operated by the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302, respectively, and as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-11 (A), respectively. Is in the closed state at the origin position where it protrudes forward so as to incline toward the glass window 50W, and in the open state where it protrudes forward so as to incline toward the glass window 50W (FIG. 11-10 (B). ), And (see FIG. 11-11 (B)). Further, the left and right drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 are provided so as to change to the closed state by rotating to the right and to change to the open state by rotating to the left, respectively.

Further, the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are in a state of being difficult for the player to see when the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are closed (see FIG. 11-10 (A)), and when the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are in the open state. Is provided so as to be visible to the player (see FIG. 11-10 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), each character panel 038SG400A to 038SG400D has an annular rotating portion 038SG401A to 038SG401D as a movable body rotatably provided by each drive motor 038SG402A to 038SG402D, and an annular rotating portion. It is composed of circular character display units 038SG403A to 038SG403D, which are provided in 038SG401A to 038SG401D in a non-rotatable manner and on which allies A-1 to A-4, which will be described later, are displayed. Further, each character panel 038SG400A to 038SG400D is composed of a translucent member, and when the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned on, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D and the character display parts 038SG403A to 038SG403D are turned on. There is.

In the feature unit 038SG, only the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D provided around the character display units 038SG403A to 038SG403D can rotate, but the character display units 038SG403A to 038SG403D also rotate together with the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D. You may.

(Super reach production)
Next, the super reach effect (hereinafter, also referred to as SP reach effect) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12 to 11-15. 11-12 are diagrams showing the execution period and configuration of the SP reach effect A corresponding to the SP reach α, and FIG. 11-12 shows the execution period and configuration of the SP reach effect B corresponding to the SP reach β. It is a figure. 11-13 are explanatory views of SP reach effects A and B in FIG. 11-13, and explanatory views showing character types in FIGS. 11-13. FIG. 11-14 is a diagram showing a flow (outline) of the SP reach effect A. FIG. 11-15 is a diagram showing a flow (outline) of the SP reach effect B.

In the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the normal reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display, and then starts the normal reach effect as the variable display effect based on the variable display mode as the reach display mode. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends along with the normal reach effect without developing into the super reach effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and 11-12 (B), in the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the super reach fluctuation pattern of super reach α and the super reach fluctuation pattern of super reach β, after the variable display is started, the variable display is started. Based on the variable display mode being the reach display mode, the SP reach effect is started as the variable display effect. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends with the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-12 (A), in the SP reach effect A based on the super reach variation pattern of the super reach α, the SP reach effect (weak) is executed in the first half, and then the SP reach effect is developed in the second half. (Strong) is executed. For example, by executing a common effect between the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect (weak) in the first half, the normal reach effect does not develop into the super reach effect, and the super reach effect ends without developing, and the super reach effect (super reach effect). Since it will develop into a strong), the player can expect to develop into a super reach effect (strong) even when the normal reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (B), in the SP reach effect B, the SP reach effect (strongest) is performed from the beginning for a period longer than the effect period of the SP reach effect (weak) and the SP reach effect (strong). It runs to the end.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 provides a development suggestion effect that suggests that the SP reach effect A based on the super reach variation pattern of the super reach α develops into an SP reach effect (strong) as an effect different from the variable display effect. It is feasible. In addition, in the super reach effect B based on the super reach fluctuation pattern of the super reach β, there is a possibility that the development suggestion effect that suggests that the effect develops and the variable display result become a big hit as an effect different from the variable display effect. It is possible to execute a cut-in effect that suggests the degree of expectation) and a decision effect that notifies that the variable display result is either a big hit or a miss.

As shown in FIGS. 11-13 (A) and 11-13 (B), the SP reach effect A is an effect in which the ally character A-4 and the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 perform a battle confrontation. If the ally A-4 defeats the enemies X-1 and X-2, it will be notified that the variable display result will be a big hit, and if the ally A-4 cannot defeat the enemies X-1 and X-2. , It is notified that the variable display result is out of order.

On the other hand, in the SP reach production B, the ally character A-4 fights with the fellow ally A-1 to A-3 to challenge the destruction of the fortress of the enemy characters X-1 and X-2. It is a production, and if the enemy's fortress can be destroyed, it is notified that the variable display result will be a big hit, and if the enemy's fortress cannot be destroyed, the variable display result will be notified.

As shown in FIGS. 11-13 (B), in the SP reach effects A and B, a plurality of allies A-1, A-2, A-3, and A-4 are set as ally characters appearing in the effect. At the same time, a plurality of enemies X-1 and X-2 are set as enemy characters. The ally character is set to become stronger in the order of A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4, and the enemy character is set to become stronger in the order of enemy X-1, X-2. .. That is, the jackpot expectation when each character appears is set to be higher in the order of A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4, and the enemy characters are the enemies X-2, X-1. It is set to be higher in the order of.

In the feature section 038SG, in the SP reach effect A, the ally A-4 and the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are supposed to have a battle confrontation, but depending on the variable display result, The ally character to appear may be determined to be one of the allies A-1 to A-4, or the enemy character to appear may be determined to be one of the enemies X-1 and X-2. Further, in the SP reach effect B, all allies A-1 to A-4 appear, but the ally character to appear is determined to be one of allies A-1 to A-4 according to the variable display result. Alternatively, the enemies X-1 and X-2 may appear, or the fortress may be determined to be one of a plurality of types of fortresses having different display modes.

Further, the number and display mode of the ally character and the enemy character can be changed in various ways, and the ally character and the enemy character other than the above may be set. Further, the SP reach effects A and B may be effects in which these characters do not appear.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13 (A), the SP reach effects A and B are composed of a plurality of effect parts. The SP reach effect A is an effect part N1-0 from the start of the variable display until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and the effect part SP1-1 to SP1 started after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. It is composed of -5. Further, the SP reach effect B includes the effect part N2-0 from the start of the variable display until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and the effect part SP2-1 started after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. It is composed of ~ SP2-11.

First, the outline of the flow of the SP reach effect A and the outline of each effect part will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-13 (A) and 11-14.

In N1-0, when the super reach variation pattern of SP reach α is determined as the variation pattern based on the occurrence of the start winning, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. After that, although not shown in detail, the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode after the advance notice effect suggesting the expectation of the big hit and the effect suggesting the start of the battle confrontation are executed.

In SP1-1, in the first stage (for example, the background is a city), a battle confrontation between the ally A-4 and the enemy X-1 is started. A predetermined time has passed since the battle confrontation started, and after the ally A-4 defeats the enemy X-1, in SP1-2, the movable body 32 falls, and the SP reach production (strong) is achieved. A development suggestion effect that suggests development is executed.

Next, in SP1-3, a battle confrontation between the ally A-4 and the new enemy X-2 is started in the second stage (for example, the background is a wilderness) different from the first stage. After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the battle confrontation, the operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B is started in SP1-4. The period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, that is, the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period of the chance button 631B, or the operation valid period ends without the operation of the chance button 631B being detected. The production is decided at the timing. In the fixed effect, if the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and an effect image that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed. If the variable display result is off, the movable body 32 is displayed. An image in which the glass is cracked is displayed because 32 does not move from the origin position to the effect position.

In SP1-5, when the variable display result is a big hit, after the image that the ally A-1 won the battle confrontation with the enemy X-2 is displayed, the big hit confirmation symbol is displayed to notify the big hit confirmation. If the variable display result is out of order, the out-of-order confirmation symbol is displayed along with the image of the broken glass showing that the ally A-1 has lost the battle confrontation with the enemy X-2. Is done.

In the SP reach effect (weak), the effect parts SP1-1 to SP1-2 are executed, and in the SP reach effect (strong), the effect parts SP1-3 to SP1-5 are executed.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, in the effect parts N1-0 and SP1-1 to SP1-3, the operation control execution data of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the wing 038SG221, 038SG322 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are set in the process data. Wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are not operated because the extension command is not received. Further, when the extended command D008 is received in the effect part SP1-4, the operation control for operating the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D in the third operation pattern to operate according to the falling operation of the movable body 32 is performed. In the effect part SP1-5, the operation control for operating the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D in the fourth operation pattern based on the operation control execution data set in the process data is executed.

Next, the outline of the flow of the SP reach effect B and the outline of each effect part will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-13 (B) and 11-15.

In N2-0, when the super reach variation pattern of SP reach β is determined as the variation pattern based on the occurrence of the start winning, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. After that, although not shown in detail, the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode after the advance notice effect suggesting the expectation of the big hit and the effect suggesting the start of the fortress destruction are executed.

In SP2-1, after a blackout effect is performed in which the display area 5E is displayed on a black screen, allies A-4 call on their friends (friends A-1 to A-3) to gather, and in SP2-2, allies. A-1 to A-4 gather. Next, in SP2-3, the reach title name (type) of the SP reach effect is notified, and in SP2-4, the development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the effect (execution of fortress destruction) by dropping the movable body 32. Is executed.

In SP2-5, the operation name of the fortress destruction (for example, attack operation A) is notified, and in SP2-6 and SP2-7, allies A1-1 to 1-3 fight together to attack the fortress. , SP2-8 attacks the fortress by ally A1-4. Next, in SP2-9, when the execution of the cut-in effect is determined in step 038SGS278, the determined type of cut-in effect is executed. If the execution is not decided, only the background image is displayed.

In SP2-10, the operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B is started. The period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, that is, the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period of the chance button 631B, or the operation valid period ends without the operation of the chance button 631B being detected. The production is decided at the timing. In the fixed effect, if the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and an effect image that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed. If the variable display result is off, the movable body 32 is displayed. 32 does not move from the origin position to the effect position, and an image in which the glass is cracked is displayed.

In SP2-11, when the variable display result is a big hit, after the image of the successful destruction of the fortress by allies A-1 to A-4 is displayed, the big hit confirmation symbol is displayed to notify the big hit confirmation. However, if the variable display result is out of order, the out-of-order confirmation symbol is displayed along with the image of the broken glass indicating that the fortress has failed to be destroyed by allies A-1 to A-4. Will be.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the extended command in the effect parts N2-0, SP2-1, SP2-4, and SP2-5, so that the rotating unit 038SG401A of the wing 038SG221, 038SG322 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D ~ 038 SG401D is not operated. Further, when the extended command D033 is received in the effect part SP2-2, the operation control for operating the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D in the second operation pattern to operate according to the switching display of the character image is executed. However, by not receiving the extended command in the effect part SP2-3, the wing 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in the fourth operation pattern based on the operation control execution data set in the process data. Take control.

Further, when the extended command D036 is received in the production parts SP2-6 to SP2-8, the first wing 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating unit 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in accordance with the rhythm (beat) of the production BGM such as music. When the operation control to be operated by the operation pattern is executed and the extended command D008 is received in the effect part SP2-10, the wings 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated according to the falling operation of the movable body 32. By executing the operation control to operate in the three operation patterns and not receiving the extended command in the effect part SP2-11, the operation control execution data set in the process data of the wing 038SG221, 038SG322 and the rotating unit 038SG401A to 038SG401D. The operation control to operate according to the fourth operation pattern based on is executed.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 11-14 and 11-15, for example, in the upper left of the display area 5E of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage number (for example, the number "2"), the first 2 A display area is provided to display the number of reserved memories (for example, the number "0") and the small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (for example, the arrow "↓↓↓"), and is synchronized with the variable display of the decorative symbol. The small symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the lower part of the display area 5E of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage display area in which the first special figure reserved storage number can be displayed by the number of circular reserved displays and the second special figure reserved storage number are circular. A hold display area including a second hold storage display area that can be displayed according to the number of hold displays and an active display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display may be provided. ..

Regarding the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, the pending display, the small symbol, and the error display (not shown) indicating the error state generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ally characters A-1 to A- By displaying it on the front side (upper layer) of the effect images such as 4 and the enemy characters X-1, X-2, the effect images are duplicated and the first hold memory number, the second hold memory number, the small pattern, etc. While it is possible to prevent the visibility of the error display from being reduced, by displaying the decorative pattern on the back side (lower layer) of the effect image, the decorative pattern is duplicated and the visibility of the effect image is reduced. It may be prevented from doing so.

(Example of production operation of Super Reach Production B)
Next, a detailed production operation example of the SP reach effect B will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-16 to 11-18. FIG. 11-16 is an example of an effect operation showing the flow from the effect parts N2 to SP2-4 of the SP reach effect B. FIG. 11-17 is an example of an effect operation showing the flow of the effect parts N2-5 to SP2-8 of the SP reach effect B. FIG. 11-18 is an example of an effect operation showing the flow of the effect parts N2-9 to SP2-11 of the SP reach effect B.

In the following, the frame number described in the upper left of each frame (effect screen) of FIGS. 11-16 to 11-18 (for example, SP2 in the upper left of each frame (effect screen) corresponding to the effect part SP2-1). -1A, SP2-1B, SP2-1C, etc.) will be described.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in the effect part N2-0 of the SP reach effect B, when the super reach variation pattern of the SP reach β is determined as the variation pattern based on the occurrence of the start winning prize, each decorative symbol is determined. Variable display of decorative symbols is started in the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (N2-0A). After that, although not shown in detail, the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode after the advance notice effect suggesting the expectation of the big hit and the effect suggesting the start of the fortress destruction are executed (N2-0B).

In SP2-1, after the blackout effect in which the display area 5E is displayed on a black screen is performed (SP2-1A), the image A-4Z of the ally A-4 appears after a predetermined time has elapsed (SP2-). 1B), the character image 038SG501 and the voice "Lend everyone's power!" Are output, and the friends (friends A-1 to A-3) are called to gather (SP2-1C). In SP2-2, after the background image 038SG502 is displayed (SP2-2A), first, the image A-4Z of the ally A-4 is gradually enlarged and displayed from the back side to the front side of the screen, and is enlarged. Accordingly, the rotating portion 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D rotates counterclockwise (SP2-2B, SP2-2C).

Next, after the display of the image A-4Z is completed while the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401D is continued, the image A-3Z of the ally A-3 is gradually enlarged and displayed from the back side to the front side of the screen. The rotating portion 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C is rotated clockwise (SP2-2D, SP2-2E) according to the enlarged display.

Further, after the display of the image A-3Z is finished while the rotation of the rotating portions 038SG401D and 038SG401C is continued, the image A-2Z of the ally A-2 is gradually enlarged and displayed from the back side to the front side of the screen. At the same time, the rotating portion 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B rotates counterclockwise (SP2-2F, SP2-2G) according to the enlarged display.

Further, after the display of the image A-1Z is completed while the rotation of the rotating portions 038SG401D, 038SG401C, and 038SG401B is continued, the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 is gradually enlarged and displayed from the back side to the front side of the screen. At the same time, the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A rotates clockwise (SP2-2H, SP2-2I) according to the enlarged display. As a result, allies A-1 to A-4 are gathered.

In SP2-3, the character image 038SG503 is displayed step by step while being gradually enlarged and displayed from the back side to the front side of the screen, and finally the reach of the SP reach effect "SP reach effect B!" After the title name (type) is configured and displayed, and when the first character image 038SG503 of "S" is displayed, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state (SP2-3A). The opening and closing operations (opening and closing operations) are repeated at intervals, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate and stop all at once in accordance with the opening and closing operations (opening and closing operations). SP2-3A to SP2-3F).

Further, the third closed state (SP2-3E) of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 is maintained for a longer time than the first and second closed states (SP2-3A, SP2-3C), and the third open state (SP2). -3F) was maintained for a longer time than the first and second open states (SP2-3B, SP2-3D), so that the character image 038SG503 "SP reach effect B!" Was displayed. Wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 can be made to look more suitable by opening and closing operations.

In SP2-4, after the variable display mode is changed to the reach display mode (SP2-4A), the movable body 32 is dropped and the effect image 038SG504 that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed, thereby developing the effect (SP2-4). A development suggestion effect suggesting (execution of fortress destruction) is executed (SP2-4B).

As shown in FIGS. 11-17, in SP2-5, after the development suggestion effect is completed, the background becomes dark (SP2-5A), the background becomes a little brighter, and the image A-4Z and "not one person". After the character image 038SG505 is displayed (SP2-5B), the character image 038SG505 is enlarged and displayed (SP2-5C). Then, after the character image 038SG505 is switched and displayed from "I am not alone ..." to the character "I will show everyone's power!", And the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state (SP2). -5D), the image 038SG506 indicating the operation name of the fortress destruction is displayed, and the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state (SP2-5E).

In SP2-6, first, the image A-1Z in which the ally A-1 attacks the fortress is displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state, the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D is displayed. ~ 038SG401D rotates and stops all at once (SP2-6A). Next, the images A-2Z in which the ally A-2 attacks the fortress are displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D all at once. Rotate / stop (SP2-6B). Next, the images A-3Z in which the ally A-3 attacks the fortress are displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D all at once. Rotate / stop (SP2-6C).

In addition, the images A-1Z in which the ally A-1 attacks the fortress are displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D all at once. Rotate / stop (SP2-6D). Next, the images A-2Z in which the ally A-2 attacks the fortress are displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D all at once. Rotate / stop (SP2-6E). Next, the images A-3Z in which the ally A-3 attacks the fortress are displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D all at once. Rotate / stop (SP2-6F).

In SP2-7, the images A-1Z, A-2Z, and A-3Z of the gathered allies A-1, A-2, and A-3 are gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the switching timing of the enlarged display. At the same time, the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate by a predetermined angle (for example, about 10 degrees) (SP2-7A to SP2-7C).

In SP2-8, the image A-4Z in which the ally A-4 attacks the fortress is displayed, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are displayed while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state. Rotate and stop all at once (SP2-8A). Next, the images A-4Z in which the ally A-4 attacks the fortress are enlarged and displayed, and while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D all at once. It rotates and stops at (SP2-8B).

Then, after the images 038SG507 in which the fortress is attacked are displayed, and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate and stop all at once while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the open state to the closed state ( SP2-8C), the image A-4Z in which the ally A-4 attacks the fortress is displayed, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are displayed while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 change from the closed state to the open state. Rotate and stop all at once (SP2-8D). Then, the same operation as SP2-8C and SP2-8D is repeated once more (SP2-8E, SP2-8F).

Next, the images A-1Z, A-2Z, A-3Z, and A-4Z of the gathered allies A-1, A-2, A-3, and A-4 are displayed, and the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are opened. After the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are stopped (SP2-8G) while being maintained in the state, the image A-4Z in which the ally A-4 makes the final attack is displayed, and the wing 038SG221 is displayed. , The rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate at a low speed while the 038SG321 is maintained in the open state (SP2-8H).

In SP2-9, when the execution of the cut-in effect pattern CP-4 is determined in step 038SGS278, the cut-in image 038SG601 of the ally A-1 is displayed, and the character panel 038SG400A corresponding to the ally A-1 is displayed. The rotating unit 038SG401A rotates (SP2-9A). Next, after the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A is stopped, the cut-in image 038SG602 of the ally A-2 is displayed on the upper display layer of the cut-in image 038SG601, and the character corresponding to the ally A-2 is displayed. The rotating portion 038SG401B of the panel 038SG400B rotates (SP2-9B). Next, after the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B is stopped, the cut-in image 038SG603 of the ally A-3 is displayed on the upper display layer of the cut-in images 038SG601 and 038SG602, and corresponds to the ally A-3. The rotating portion 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C rotates (SP2-9C). Next, after the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C is stopped, the cut-in image 038SG604 of the ally A-4 is displayed on the upper display layer of the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG603 and corresponds to the ally A-4. The rotating portion 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D rotates (SP2-9D).

Then, after the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D is stopped, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG322 change from the open state to the closed state, and the ally A-4 is switched to the cut-in image 038SG605 to attack with a punch ( SP2-9E), Wings 038SG221, 038SG322 change from the closed state to the open state, and the image 038SG606 in which the ally A-4 makes the final blow is displayed (SP2-9F).

In SP2-10, an operation promotion image 038SG650 that promotes the operation of the chance button 631B is displayed (SP2-10A). The operation promotion image 038SG650 is displayed, that is, the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period of the chance button 631B, or the operation valid period ends without the operation of the chance button 631B being detected. The decision production is executed at the timing.

In the decision effect, if the variable display result is a big hit, the operation valid period ends when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period of the chance button 631B, or the operation of the chance button 631B is not detected. At the same timing, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, the effect image 038SG651 that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate (SP2-10B). ). After that, the movable body 32 moves from the effect position to the origin position, the rotation of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D stops, and the image 038SG652 just before the fortress is destroyed is displayed (SP2-10C). ).

If the variable display result is off, the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period of the chance button 631B, or the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the chance button 631B. Then, the image 038SG653 in which the glass is cracked is displayed while the movable body 32 does not move from the origin position to the effect position and the rotation of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D is stopped (SP2-10D).

In SP2-11, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit confirmation symbol is displayed after the image 038SG654 showing that the fortress was successfully destroyed by the allies A-1 to A-4 is displayed (SP2-11A). By doing so, a big hit confirmation notification is performed (SP2-11B). On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the image 038SG653 with cracked glass indicating that the fortress has failed to be destroyed by allies A-1 to A-4 is displayed, and the out-of-order confirmation symbol is displayed. The loss confirmation notification is performed (SP2-11C).

(Example of production operation control in the production part)
Next, an example of effect operation control of a part of the effect part in the SP reach effect B will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-19 to 11-21. 11-19 is a diagram showing an effect control example of the effect part SP2-2 in FIG. 11-19, and a diagram showing an effect operation control example of the effect part SP2-3 in FIG. 11-19. 11-20 is a diagram showing an effect control example of the effect part SP2-6, and FIG. 11-20 is a diagram showing an effect operation control example of the effect part SP2-7. 11-21 is a diagram showing an effect control example of the effect part SP2-8 in FIG. 11-21, and a diagram showing an effect operation control example of the effect part SP2-10 in FIG. 11-21.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation control) set in the process table prepared according to each fluctuation pattern. The effect device such as the image display device 5 is controlled according to (execution data, etc.). Therefore, when performing reach effects such as N reach effect and SP reach effects A and B, control is performed to display various images on the image display device 5 based on the display control execution data of the process data, and the lamp control execution of the process data is executed. Based on the data, control is performed to turn on / off various lamps such as the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D, and based on the sound control execution data of the process data, the sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (for example, BGM of voice, music, etc.) ) Is continuously output, and based on the operation control execution data, the movable body 32, the wings 038SG221, 038SG321, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D, and the like are controlled to operate.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, when the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command from the display control unit 123, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned on / off, and the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating unit 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated. Control is performed based on the lamp control data and the operation control data prepared according to the type of the extended command, which are control data different from the lamp control execution data and the operation control execution data of the process data. ..

In the feature unit 038SG, the lamp control data corresponding to the extended command BXXX is not shown, and the operation control data corresponding to the extended commands D033, D036, and D008 are shown in FIGS. 11-22 to 11-26. However, it will be described later.

First, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-2 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the background image 038SG502 on the image display device 5 based on the process data display control execution data in SP2-2A of the effect part SP2-2. A command for causing the display is output to the display control unit 123. Along with this, the display control unit 123 generates an image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area as a background image 038SG502 (image data) for displaying on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area, and the background. When performing display processing to output image 038SG502 (image data) as a video signal, that is, when displaying the background image 038SG502 on the image display device 5 in SP2-2A, the extended command D033 and the extended command BXXX are generated. It is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the extended command D033 secondly sets the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D based on the operation control data (see FIGS. 11-22 and 11-23) corresponding to the extended command D033. Operation control to operate according to the operation pattern and control to turn on / off the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D in a predetermined lighting pattern based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX are started. Start.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A), in SP2-2A to SP2-2I of the effect part SP2-2, the effect control CPU 120 is an image display device based on the display control execution data of the process data. The background image 038SG502, the image A-4Z, the image A-3Z, the image A-2Z, and the image A-1Z are displayed in order on the 5, and based on the sound control execution data of the process data, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. BGM is continuously output.

Further, based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned off, and then the character panel LED 038SG404D, the character panel LED 038SG404C, the character panel LED 038SG404B, and the character panel LED 038SG404A are turned on in this order. To go.

Further, based on the operation control data for the wing corresponding to the extended command D033 (see FIG. 11-22), the wing 038SG221 and 038SG321 are maintained in the open state, while the operation control for the character panel corresponding to the extended command D033 is performed. Based on the data (see FIG. 11-23), the rotating unit 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated in the order of the rotating unit 038SG401D, the rotating unit 038SG401C, the rotating unit 038SG401B, and the rotating unit 038SG401A.

As described above, in SP2-2A to SP2-2I of the effect part SP2-2, the effect control CPU 120 displays the images A-4Z to A-1Z on the image display device 5 in accordance with the display. Lamp control that turns on the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D corresponding to each image A-4Z to A-1Z in order, and rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D corresponding to each displayed image A-4Z to A-1Z in order. The operation control of the second operation pattern to be performed is executed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 expands and displays the images A-1Z to A- so as to correspond to the display period from the start to the end of the enlarged display of each of the images A-1Z to A-4Z. It is possible to execute operation control based on the second operation pattern in which the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D corresponding to 4Z are individually rotated.

As described above, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for displaying on the image display device 5 to the display control unit 123, and the image to be displayed by the display control unit 123 is displayed. By performing a display process of generating and displaying the image on the image display device 5, for example, when displaying a high-quality image having a large data capacity, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 and then actually displays the command. Since there is a possibility that a time lag may occur before the image is displayed, when the effect control CPU 120 rotates the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D according to the image display, the image display and the start timing of the operation are slightly deviated. There is a possibility that it will end up. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 adjusts to the display of the image by starting the operation control based on the extended command output when the display control unit 123 performs the display process of displaying the image on the image display device 5. It is possible to start the rotation of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D at a suitable timing.

Next, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-3 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (B), in SP2-3A to SP2-3F of the effect part SP2-3, the effect control CPU 120 displays characters on the image display device 5 based on the display control execution data of the process data. The image 038SG503 is gradually enlarged and displayed, and BGM such as music is continuously output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound control execution data of the process data.

Further, since the extended command as the lamp control information is not received, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned off from SP2-3A to SP2-3E based on the lamp control execution data of the process data, and then SP2-3F. The character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned on at.

Further, since the extended command as the control information for the movable body is not received, the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are changed between the closed state and the open state at regular intervals based on the operation control execution data of the process data. The rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D are repeatedly rotated and stopped in accordance with the opening and closing operations of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321.

As described above, in SP2-3A to SP2-3F of the effect part SP2-3, the effect control CPU 120 is used as the operation control execution data of the process data regardless of the display of the image or the output of the sound on the image display device 5. It is possible to execute the operation control based on the fourth operation pattern to be operated based on.

Next, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-6 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-20 (A), in SP2-6A of the effect part SP2-6, the display control unit 123 has an extended command D036 and an extended command when displaying the image A-1Z on the image display device 5. BXXX is generated and transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

In SP2-6A to SP2-6F of the effect part SP2-6, the effect control CPU 120 displays the image A-1Z, the image A-2Z, and the image A- on the image display device 5 based on the display control execution data of the process data. 3Z is displayed in order, and BGM such as music is continuously output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound control execution data of the process data. In the production part SP2-6, for example, a low-volume sound effect (small) and a high-volume sound effect (large) such as "Don" and "Jean" are repeated with a constant rhythm on the BGM. It is designed to be output.

Further, based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are blinked at the timing when the sound effect (small) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , The control to turn on the light is repeated according to the timing when the sound effect (large) is output from 8R.

Further, based on the operation control data for the wing corresponding to the extended command D036 (see FIG. 11-22), the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are closed at the timing when the sound effect (small) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. While changing to the state, the control of changing to the open state is repeated according to the timing when the sound effect (large) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Further, based on the operation control data for the character panel corresponding to the extended command D036 (see FIG. 11-23), the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D are adjusted to the timing when the sound effect (small) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. While rotating / stopping, the control of rotating / stopping is repeated according to the timing at which the sound effect (large) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in SP2-6A to SP2-6F of the effect part SP2-6, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and lights the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D, and produces sound effects (small) from the speakers 8L and 8R. The wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are opened and closed according to the rhythm (timing) at which a beat such as a sound effect (large) is output, and the operation control of the first operation pattern for rotating and stopping the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D is executed. .. That is, the effect control CPU 120 operates the wing 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D so as to correspond to the rhythm of the effect sound, and the operation control based on the first operation pattern (wing 038SG221 so as to correspond to the rhythm of the effect sound). , 038SG321 and the operation control for interlocking the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D) can be executed.

Next, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-7 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-20 (B), in SP2-7A to SP2-7C of the effect part SP2-7, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image on the image display device 5 based on the display control execution data of the process data. A-1Z, image A-2Z, and image A-3Z are gradually enlarged and displayed, and BGM such as music is continuously output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound control execution data of the process data. In the production part SP2-7, the sound effect (large) is repeatedly output with a constant rhythm on the BGM.

Further, based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned on at the timing when the sound effect (large) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then turned off. Repeat control.

Further, based on the operation control data for the wing corresponding to the extended command D036 (see FIG. 11-22), the wing 038SG221 and 038SG321 are maintained in the open state, while the operation control for the character panel corresponding to the extended command D036 is performed. Based on the data (see FIGS. 11-23), the control of rotating the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D in accordance with the timing at which the sound effect (large) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R and then stopping is repeated.

As described above, in SP2-7A to SP2-7C of the effect part SP2-7, the effect control CPU 120 has a lamp control for turning on and off the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D, and a sound effect (large) from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to the rhythm (timing) at which the beat is output, while keeping the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 in the open state, the operation control of the first operation pattern of rotating only the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D and then stopping them is executed. .. That is, the effect control CPU 120 operates the rotation unit 038SG401A to 038SG401D so as to correspond to the rhythm of the effect sound, and the operation control based on the first operation pattern (wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotation unit corresponding to the rhythm of the effect sound). Operation control for interlocking 038SG401A to 038SG401D) can be executed.

Next, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-8 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), in SP2-8A of the effect part SP2-8, the display control unit 123 has an extended command D036 and an extended command when displaying the image A-1Z on the image display device 5. BXXX is generated and transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

In SP2-8A to SP2-8G of the effect part SP2-8, the effect control CPU 120 attacks the image display device 5 with the image A-4Z in which the ally A-4 attacks the fortress based on the display control execution data of the process data. The image 038SG507 and the like in which the fortress is attacked are displayed, and BGM such as music is continuously output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound control execution data of the process data. In the production part SP2-8, for example, a low-volume sound effect (small) and a high-volume sound effect (large) such as "Don" and "Jean" are repeated with a constant rhythm on the BGM. It is designed to be output.

Further, based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are blinked at the timing when the sound effect (small) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , The control to turn on the light is repeated according to the timing when the sound effect (large) is output from 8R.

Further, based on the operation control data for the wing corresponding to the extended command D036 (see FIG. 11-24), the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are closed at the timing when the sound effect (small) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. While changing to the state, the control of changing to the open state is repeated according to the timing when the sound effect (large) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Further, based on the operation control data (see FIG. 11-25) for the character panel corresponding to the extended command D036, the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D are adjusted to the timing when the sound effect (small) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. While rotating / stopping, the control of rotating / stopping is repeated according to the timing at which the sound effect (large) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, from SP2-8F to SP2-8H, while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are kept in the open state, the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated at a low speed for a predetermined time and then stopped in SP2-8H.

In this way, in SP2-8A to SP2-8G of the effect part SP2-8, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and lights the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D, and produces sound effects (small) from the speakers 8L and 8R. The wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are opened and closed according to the rhythm (timing) at which a beat such as a sound effect (large) is output, and the operation control of the first operation pattern for rotating and stopping the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D is executed. .. That is, the effect control CPU 120 operates the wing 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D so as to correspond to the rhythm of the effect sound, and the operation control based on the first operation pattern (wing 038SG221 so as to correspond to the rhythm of the effect sound). , 038SG321 and the operation control for interlocking the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D) can be executed.

Next, the effect operation control of the effect part SP2-10 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), in SP2-10A of the effect part SP2-10, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion image 038SG650 on the image display device 5 based on the display control execution data of the process data. While displaying the display, the character panels LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned on while the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are kept in the open state.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 is movable at the timing when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period of the chance button 631B, or at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the chance button 631B. The body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position, and the effect image 038SG651 that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed. Here, when the effect image 038SG651 is displayed on the image display device 5, the display control unit 123 generates an extended command D008 and an extended command BXXX and transmits them to the effect control CPU 120.

Therefore, in SP2-10B of the effect part SP2-10, the effect control CPU 120 controls to blink the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D based on the lamp control data (not shown) corresponding to the extended command BXXX.

Further, based on the operation control data (see FIGS. 11-26) for the character panel corresponding to the extended command D008, the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D are controlled to be rotated and then stopped for a predetermined time. After that, the movable body 32 is raised to return to the origin position.

As described above, in SP2-10A to SP2-10C of the effect part SP2-10, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the drop of the movable body 32 regardless of the image display or sound output to the image display device 5. It is possible to execute the operation control based on the third operation pattern to be operated.

(Operation control data)
Next, the operation control data of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D based on the extended command will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-22 to 11-26. 11-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the operation control data of the wing based on the extended command D033 in (A) and the control data of (A) in (B) and (C). 11-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D033 in (A) and the control data of (A) in (B), (C) and (D). FIG. 11-24 is a diagram showing operation control data of the wing based on the extended command D036. FIG. 11-25 is a diagram showing operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D036. 11-26 is a diagram showing operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D008.

As shown in FIG. 11-22 (A), the operation control data of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 based on the extended command D033 is the final control for controlling the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 as movable bodies. It is composed of a plurality of control data tables composed of a plurality of control data arranged in a time series including data. The plurality of control data tables are a grandchild control data table 038SG801A and 038SG801B (lower control data table) and a control data table higher than the grandchild control data tables 038SG801A and 038SG801B (medium control data table). It is a control data table higher than the child control data table 038SG802 and the child control data table 038SG802 in which the control period in which the data table is used and the storage destination address of the grandchild control data table are defined, and the child control data. The control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG801A and 038SG801B includes the parent control data table 038SG803 (upper control data table) in which the control period in which the table is used and the storage destination address of the child control data table are defined. A control period in which the control data is used, an operation period for one-step operation, and an operation upper limit are defined.

Specifically, the parent control data table 038SG803 (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_AJ_LSDHD_D033 []) defines the control period in which the child control data table 038SG802 is used and the storage destination address of the child control data table (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D033). []).

In the child control data table 038SG802 (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D033 []), the control period in which the grandchild control data tables 038SG801A and 038SG801B are used and the storage destination address of the grandchild control data tables 038SG801A and 038SG801B are defined (1800, & XD___LSDHD_D033_1, 1800, & XD___LSDHD_D033_2, etc.).

The grandchild control data table 038SG801A (const struct S_MOTO XD___LSDHD_D033_1 []) is control data for changing the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 to the closed state, and the grandchild control data table 038SG801B (const struct S_MOTO XD___LSDHD_D033_2) It is used as control data for changing the 038SG321 to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 11-22 (B), for example, in the control data of "{10 * 10,10, MOT_R_Z},", "10" on the left side is a step of operating a motor (drive motor 038SG202, 038SG302). The number, the second, and the third "10" indicate the time required to make one step. "MOT" indicates a motor (drive motors 038SG202, 038SG302), "R" indicates clockwise rotation, and "Z" indicates that the sensor is the upper limit. That is, the control data of "{10 * 10,10, MOT_R_Z}," is the control data for executing the operation control in which the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 are rotated clockwise for 100 ms and the operation is stopped when the sensor is detected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (C), for example, in the control data of "{10 * 10,10, MOT_SDHD_DERU_LIMIT},", "10" on the left side operates a motor (drive motor 038SG202, 038SG302). The number of steps to be performed, the second and third "10" indicates the time required to perform one step. "MOT" is a motor (drive motor 038SG202, 038SG302), "SDHD" is wing 038SG221, 038SG321 (see FIG. 11-32 (A)), and "DERU_LIMIT" is up to the number of steps (= 247 steps) specified on the software. Indicates that it will be put out at the upper limit. That is, the control data of "{10 * 10,10, MOT_SDHD_DERU_LIMIT}," rotates the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 for 100 ms, and stops the operation after rotating to the number of steps (= 247 steps) specified on the software. It is control data for executing operation control.

Then, the operation control based on the control data of the plurality of grandchild control data tables 038SG801A and 038SG801B set in the child control data table 038SG802 (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D033 []) is executed in order. The operations corresponding to SP2-3A to SP2-3F are executed.

Further, the feature unit 038SG exemplifies a mode in which the operation of the left and right wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 is controlled by the control data shown in FIG. 11-22 (A), but the present invention is not limited thereto. Control data corresponding to each of the left and right wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 may be set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), the operation control data of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D based on the extended command D033 is the drive motor 038SG402A of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D as a movable body. The control data of the parent control data tables 038SG813A to 038SG813D is composed of the parent control data tables 038SG813A to 038SG813D composed of a plurality of control data arranged in a time series including the final control data for controlling the ~ 038SG402D so as not to operate. , The control period in which the control data is used and the rotation direction are defined.

The parent control data table 038SG813A (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKU_D033 []) is control data for operating the rotating unit 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A, and the parent control data table 038SG813B (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A3 The parent control data table 038SG813C (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKS_D033 []) is the control data for operating the rotating unit 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C, and is the parent control data table. 038SG813D (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSMKS_D033 []) is control data for operating the rotating portion 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), for example, in the control data of "2800, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]", "2800" is the control time (ms), "J" is the child control data table, and "LSHKU" is. The rotating portion 038SG401A, "STOP" of the upper left character panel 038SG400A indicates that the drive motor 038SG402A is stopped by full-thickness excitation. That is, the control data of "2800, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]" is the control data for executing the operation control for stopping the drive motor 038SG402A for 2800 ms.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), for example, in the control data of "10970, & XD_J_LSHKU_CW [0]", "10970" is the control time (ms), "J" is the child control data table, and "LSHKU" is. The rotating part 038SG401A, "CW" of the character panel 038SG400A on the upper left indicates that the drive motor 038SG402A is rotated clockwise (clockwise). That is, the control data of "10970, & XD_J_LSHKU_CW [0]" is the control data for executing the operation control for rotating the drive motor 038SG402A clockwise for 10970 ms.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (D), for example, in the control data of "13700, & XD_J_LSHKU_CCW [0]", "13700" is the control time (ms), "J" is the child control data table, and "LSHKU" is. The rotating portion 038SG401A, "CCW" of the character panel 038SG400A on the upper left indicates that the drive motor 038SG402A is rotated counterclockwise. That is, the control data of "10970, & XD_J_LSHKU_CW [0]" is the control data for executing the operation control for rotating the drive motor 038SG402A clockwise for 10970 ms.

Then, the parent control data table 038SG813A (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKU_D033 []), 038SG813B (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSMKU_D033 []), 038SG813C (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_D_A_S_A_ Since the operation control based on the plurality of control data is executed, the operations corresponding to SP2-2B of the effect part SP2-2 to SP2-4A of the effect part SP2-4 are executed.

Further, the parent control data tables 038SG813A, 038SG813B, 038SG813C, and 038SG813D are set with control data for rotating the rotating unit 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A, so that the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated. You can do it. That is, since the operation of each rotating unit 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be controlled by using one common control data, the data capacity can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-24, the operation control data of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 based on the extended command D036 is the final control for controlling the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 as movable bodies. It is composed of a plurality of control data tables composed of a plurality of control data arranged in a time series including data. The plurality of control data tables are a control data table higher than the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D (lower control data tables) and the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D, and are used by the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D. Controls higher than the child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C (medium control data table) and the child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C in which the control period to be controlled and the storage destination address of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D are defined. In the data table, the parent control data table 038SG823 (upper control data table) in which the control period in which the child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C are used and the storage destination address of the child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C are defined. , And the control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D are defined with a control period in which the control data is used, an operation period for one-step operation, and an operation upper limit.

Specifically, in the parent control data table 038SG823 (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSDHD_D036 []), the control period in which the child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C are used and the storage destination address of the child control data table are defined (11890, & XD_J_LSDHD_D036_1 [0], 8190, & XD_J_LSDHD_D036_2 [0], 600000, & XD_J_LSDHD_D036_3 [0]).

Child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D036_1 [], const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D036_2 [], const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D036_ The storage destination address of is defined (1280, & XD___LSDHD_D036_1 [0], 1280, & XD___LSDHD_D036_2 [0], 3556, & XD___LSDHD_D036_4 [0], etc.).

The grandchild control data table 038SG821A (const struct S_MOTO XD___LSDHD_D036_1 []) is the control data for changing the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 to the open state, and the grandchild control data table 038SG821B (const struct S_MOTO XD___LSDHD_D036_2) The grandchild control data table 038SG821C (const struct S_MOTO XD___LSDHD_D036_3 []) is control data for changing the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 to the open state, and is the grandchild control data table. The 038SG821D (const struct S_MOTO XD___LSDHD_D036_4 []) is used as control data for changing the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 to the closed state.

Since the control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A to 038SG821D are the same as the control data described with reference to FIGS. 11-22, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, the child control data tables 038SG822A to 038SG822C (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D036_1 [], const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D036_2 [], const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSDHD_D036_ Since the operation control is executed, the operation corresponding to the effect parts SP2-5 to SP2-8 is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25, the operation control data of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D based on the extended command D038 is the drive motors 038SG402A to 038SG402D of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D as a movable body. It is composed of a plurality of control data tables composed of a plurality of control data arranged in a time series including the final control data to be controlled so as not to operate. The plurality of control data tables are a control data table higher than the grandchild control data tables 038SG831, 038SG841 (lower control data table) and the grandchild control data tables 038SG831, 038SG841, and the control period in which the grandchild control data table is used. And the child control data tables 038SG832 and 038SG842 (medium control data table) in which the storage destination address of the grandchild control data table is defined, and the control data table higher than the child control data tables 038SG832 and 038SG842. The grandchild control data table 038SG831, including the parent control data tables 038SG833 and 038SG843 (upper control data table) in which the control period in which the child control data table is used and the storage destination address of the child control data table are defined, The control data of 038SG841 defines a control period in which the control data is used and a rotation direction.

The parent control data table 038SG833 (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKU_D036 []) is control data for operating the rotating unit 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A, and includes a plurality of control data, a control period in which the child control data table 038SG832 is used, and the control period. The storage destination address of the child control data table is defined (600000, & XD_J_LSHKU_D036 [0]). On the other hand, the parent control data table 038SG843 (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSMKU_D036 []) is control data for operating the rotating unit 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B, and is a control period in which a plurality of control data and the child control data table 038SG842 are used. And the storage destination address of the child control data table are defined (600000, & XD_J_LSMKU_D036 [0]).

Since the plurality of control data described in the parent control data tables 038SG833 and 038SG843 are the same as the control data described with reference to FIGS. 11-23, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The child control data table 038SG832 (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSHKU_D036 []) defines the control period in which the grandchild control data table 038SG831 is used and the storage destination address of the grandchild control data table (600000, & XD___LSHKU_D036 [0]). .. On the other hand, in the child control data table 038SG842 (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSMKU_D036 []), the control period in which the grandchild control data table 038SG841 is used and the storage destination address of the grandchild control data table are defined (600000, & XD___LSMKU_D036 [0]. ]).

Then, the operation control based on the plurality of control data set in each of the parent control data table 038SG833 (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKU_D036 []) and the parent control data table 038SG843 (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSMKU_D036 []) and the child control data table 038 (Const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSHKU_D036 []) and child control data table 038SG842 (const struct S_MOTO_J XD_J_LSMKU_D036 []) Operation control based on multiple control data set in each is executed, so that the effect parts SP2-5 to SP2 The operation corresponding to -8 is executed.

Further, by setting the control data for rotating the rotating part 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A in the parent control data table 038SG833, the rotating part 038SG401C of the lower left character panel 038SG400C also rotates together. There is. Further, by setting the control data for rotating the rotating part 038SG401B of the upper right character panel 038SG400B in the parent control data table 038SG843, the rotating part 038SG401D of the lower right character panel 038SG400D also rotates together. ing. That is, the upper left and lower left rotating parts can be operated and controlled using a common one control data, and the upper right and lower right rotating parts can be operated and controlled using a common one control data. , Data capacity can be reduced.

Further, by setting the control data for rotating the rotating portion 038SG401A (LSHKU) of the upper left character panel 038SG400A as the control data of the parent control data table 038SG843, the rotating portion 038SG401B of the upper right character panel 038SG400B is rotated. Therefore, since the operation of the four rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be controlled by using common control data, the data capacity can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-26, the operation control data of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D based on the extended command D008 is the drive motors 038SG402A to 038SG402D of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D as a movable body. It is composed of a parent control data table 038SG853A to 038SG853D composed of a plurality of control data arranged in a time series including a final control data to be controlled so as not to operate, and the control data of the parent control data tables 038SG853A to 038SG853D is the control. The control period in which the data is used and the direction of rotation are defined.

The parent control data table 038SG853A (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKU_D008 []) is control data for operating the rotating unit 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A, and the parent control data table 038SG853B (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSMKU) The parent control data table 038SG853C (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKS_D008 []) is the control data for operating the rotating unit 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C, and is the parent control data table. 038SG853D (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSMKS_D008 []) is control data for operating the rotating portion 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D.

Since the control data of the parent control data tables 038SG853A to 038SG853D are the same as the control data described with reference to FIGS. 11-23, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, the parent control data table 038SG853A (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSHKU_D008 []), 038SG853B (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_A_LSMKU_D008 []), 038SG853C (const struct S_MOTO_A XD_M_S_S_S_ Since the operation control based on the plurality of control data is executed, the operations corresponding to SP2-10B to SP2-10C of the effect part SP2-10 are executed.

Further, the parent control data tables 038SG853A to 038SG853D are set with control data for rotating the rotating portion 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A so that the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be rotated. It has become. That is, since the operation of each rotating unit 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be controlled by using one common control data, the data capacity can be reduced.

(Example of wing and character panel operation control based on extended commands)
Next, an operation control example of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D performed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the extended command will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-27 to 11-32. FIG. 11-27 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation control data of the wing based on the extended command D033. FIG. 11-28 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D033. FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation control data of the wing based on the extended command D036. FIG. 11-30 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D036. FIG. 11-31 is a diagram showing an operation example of the operation control data of the character panel based on the extended command D008. 11-32 is a diagram showing (A) a wing and a character panel described in the control data, and (B) a diagram showing control data common to each extended command used for wing operation control, (C). ) Is a diagram showing control data common to each extended command used for operation control of the character panel.

The effect control CPU 120 periodically executes timer interrupt processing, and when an extended command for movable body control is received from the display control unit 123, it corresponds to the received extended command every predetermined time (for example, 1 ms). Control data table (for example, parent control data table (upper control data table) shown in FIGS. 11-22 to 11-26), child control data table (middle control data table), grandchild control data table, etc. (lower control data) The operation control of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D is executed based on the control data described in the table)).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 has a control timer (for example, a parent timer counter (parent TC) described later) capable of timing the control period in which each control data is used for control data different from the final control data in each control data table. , Child timer counter (child TC), grandchild timer counter (grandson TC), etc.) is changed to the next control data by the timer up, and the control using each control data is terminated, while the final control data. When the specific condition described later is satisfied before the control timer capable of measuring the control period in which the final control data is used is timed up, the control according to the method is terminated when the specific condition is satisfied. Further, in the above-mentioned operation control process, the parent timer counter (parent TC), the child timer counter (child TC), and the grandchild timer counter (grandchild TC) are subtracted and updated every predetermined time (for example, 1 ms).

If the storage destination address of the lower child control data table or grandchild control data table is described in the uppermost parent control data table, the control time using the child control data table or grandchild control data table is set to the parent timer counter. Set to, move to the child control data table or grandchild control data table, execute control based on the control data described in the child control data table or grandchild control data table, and when the parent timer counter is up, the next control data Move to control based on. If the storage destination address of the subordinate grandchild control data table is described in the child control data table, the control time using the grandchild control data table is set in the child timer counter, and the data table is migrated to the grandchild control data table to be grandchildren. The control based on the control data described in the control data table is executed, and when the child timer counter is timered up, the control shifts to the control based on the next control data.

(Example of wing operation control based on extended command D033)
Next, an operation control example of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 performed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the extended command D033 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 11-27, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command D033, it reads out the parent control data table 038SG803 shown in FIG. 11-22 and sets a predetermined value (for example, the parent TC) in the parent timer counter (parent TC). 6000000ms, 100 minutes) is set. Next, with reference to the child control data table 038SG802, the control time (for example, 4700 ms) of the control data described first is set in the child timer counter (child TC), and the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 are turned off (the child control data table 038SG202 and 038SG302 are turned off (). (Non-excited state).

Next, when the child timer counter is timer-up (child TC = 0), the parent timer counter is checked, and if the parent timer counter is not timer-up (parent TC> 0), it is described next to the child control data table 038SG802. Move to control of the control data. Specifically, it shifts to the grandchild control data table 038SG801A and sets the control time (for example, 1800 ms) in the child timer counter. Next, the control time (for example, 10 × 10 = 100 ms) is set to the grandchild timer counter A (grandchild TCA) based on the first control data (10 * 10,10, MOT_R_Z) described in the grandchild control data table 038SG801A. Set and rotate the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 clockwise for 10 steps in 100 ms.

Next, when the grandchild timer counter A is timer-up (grandson TCA = 0), the child timer counter is checked, and if the child timer counter is not timer-up (child TC> 0), the control data described next (child TC> 0). 10 * 8, 8, MOT_R_Z), the control time (for example, 10 × 8 = 80 ms) is set in the grandson timer counter A, and the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 are rotated clockwise by 10 steps in 80 ms. After that, when the grandchild timer counter A is timer-up (grandchild TC = 0), the child timer counter is checked, and if the child timer counter is not timer-up (child TC> 0), the control data described next is displayed. Repeat the process of executing the control based on.

Then, when the grandchild timer counter A of the final control data is timer-up (grandchild TCA = 0), if the child timer counter is not timer-up (child TC> 0), it is described in the grandchild control data table 038SG801A. It will shift to a loop state in which control based on multiple control data is repeated.

However, the control time of the last control data (600000, 6, MOT_R_Z) and the final control data (600000, 3, MOT_R_Z) is set to be longer than other control data (for example, 600,000 ms). Therefore, after starting the last control data (600000, 6, MOT_R_Z) or the final control data (600000, 3, MOT_R_Z), and before the grandchild timer counter A timers up, the child timer The counter will be timered up. Therefore, when the child timer counter is timer-up (grandson TCA> 0, child TC = 0), the parent timer counter is checked, and if the parent timer counter is not timer-up (parent TC> 0), the effect control CPU 120 Is next to the child control data table 038SG802 according to the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is enlarged and displayed (for example, the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is switched and displayed from SP2-3A to SP2-3B) assuming that the specific condition is satisfied. Move (change) to the control of the control data described in.

Specifically, it shifts to the grandchild control data table 038SG801B and sets the control time (for example, 1800 ms) in the child timer counter. Next, the control time (for example, 10 × 10 = 100 ms) is set in the grandchild timer counter B (grandchild TCB) based on the first control data (10 * 10,10, MOT_SDHD_DERU_LIMIT) described in the grandchild control data table 038SG801B. Set and rotate the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 counterclockwise for 10 steps in 100 ms.

Next, when the grandchild timer counter B is timer-up (grandson TCB = 0), the child timer counter is checked, and if the child timer counter is not timer-up (child TC> 0), the control data described next (child TC> 0). Based on 10 * 8, 8, MOT_SDHD_DERU_LIMIT), the control time (for example, 10 × 8 = 80 ms) is set in the grandchild timer counter B, and the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 are rotated counterclockwise by 10 steps at 80 ms. After that, when the grandchild timer counter B is timer-up (grandchild TC = 0), the child timer counter is checked, and if the child timer counter is not timer-up (child TC> 0), the control data described next is displayed. Repeat the process of executing the control based on.

Then, when the grandchild timer counter B of the final control data is timer-up (grandchild TCB = 0), if the child timer counter is not timer-up (child TC> 0), it is described in the grandchild control data table 038SG801B. It will shift to a loop state in which the process of executing the control based on the existing control data is repeated.

However, since the control time of the final control data (600000, 3, MOT_STOP) is set to be longer than that of other control data (for example, 600,000 ms), the final control data (600000, 3, MOT_STOP) is set. After starting the control of, the child timer counter will be timered up before the grandchild timer counter B is timered up. When the child timer counter is timer-up (grandson TCB> 0, child TC = 0), the parent timer counter is checked, and if the parent timer counter is not timer-up (parent TC> 0), the effect control CPU 120 is used. Assuming that the specific condition is satisfied, the control shifts to the control based on the control data described next to the child control data table 038SG802.

After that, after repeatedly executing the above processing, the final control data described in the child control data table 038SG802, that is, the final control data (600000, 3, MOT_STOP) described in the grandchild control data table 038SG801B After starting the control based on, before the grandchild timer counter B, the child timer counter, and the parent timer counter are timer-up (grandson TCB> 0, child TC> 0, parent TC> 0), another operation command (for example, process). When the operation command based on the data or the operation command based on another extended command is received, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the operation control of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 based on the extended command D033, assuming that the specific condition is satisfied. Shift to operation control based on other operation commands.

(Example of character panel operation control based on extended command D033)
Next, an operation control example of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D performed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the extended command D033 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 11-28, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command D033, it reads out the parent control data tables 038SG813A to 038SG813D shown in FIGS. 11-23 and describes them in each of the parent control data tables 038SG813A to 038SG813D. Starts control of the controlled control data.

First, in the parent control data table 038SG813A, a predetermined value (for example, 2800 ms) is set in the parent timer counter A (parent TCA) based on the control data (2800, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]) described first and driven. The motor 038SG402A is stopped by full-layer excitation. Next, when the parent timer counter A timers up (parent TCA = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 10970 ms) is set in the parent timer counter A based on the control data (10970, & XD_J_LSHKU_CW [0]) described next. Set and rotate the drive motor 038SG402A clockwise. Next, when the parent timer counter A timers up (parent TCA = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 6000000 ms, 100) is set in the parent timer counter A based on the control data (6000000, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]) described next. Minutes) are set, and the drive motor 038SG402A is stopped by full-thickness excitation.

Further, in the parent control data table 038SG813B, a predetermined value (for example, 2100 ms) is set in the parent timer counter B (parent TCB) based on the control data (2100, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]) described first and driven. The motor 038SG402B is stopped by full-layer excitation. Next, when the parent timer counter B timers up (parent TCB = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 11670 ms) is set in the parent timer counter B based on the control data (11670, & XD_J_LSHKU_CCW [0]) described next. Set and rotate the drive motor 038SG402B counterclockwise. Next, when the parent timer counter B timers up (parent TCB = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 6000000 ms, 100) is set in the parent timer counter B based on the control data (6000000, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]) described next. Minutes) are set, and the drive motor 038SG402B is stopped by full-thickness excitation.

Further, in the parent control data table 038SG813C, a predetermined value (for example, 700 ms) is set in the parent timer counter C (parent TCC) based on the control data (700, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]) described first and driven. The motor 038SG402C is stopped by full-layer excitation. Next, when the parent timer counter C timers up (parent TCC = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 10970 ms) is set in the parent timer counter C based on the control data (13070, & XD_J_LSHKU_CW [0]) described next. Set and rotate the drive motor 038SG402C clockwise. Next, when the parent timer counter C timers up (parent TCC = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 6000000 ms, 100) is set in the parent timer counter C based on the control data (6000000, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]) described next. Minutes) are set, and the drive motor 038SG402C is stopped by full-thickness excitation.

Further, in the parent control data table 038SG813D, a predetermined value (for example, 13700 ms) is set in the parent timer counter D based on the control data (13700, & XD_J_LSHKU_CCW [0]) described first, and the drive motor 038SG402D is left. Rotate. Next, when the parent timer counter D timers up (parent TCD = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 6000000 ms, 100) is set in the parent timer counter D based on the control data (6000000, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]) described next. Minutes) are set, and the drive motor 038SG402D is stopped by full-layer excitation.

As a result, the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D start rotating in the order of the rotating portions 038SG401D, 038SG401C, 038SG401B, and 038SG401A in the effect part SP2-2.

Further, after starting the control based on the final control data (6000000, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]) described in each of the parent control data tables 038SG813A to 038SG813D, and before the parent timer count is timer-up, another operation command ( For example, when an operation command based on process data or an operation command based on another extended command is received, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that a specific condition is satisfied, and controls the operation of the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D based on the extended command D033. Is terminated, and operation control is performed based on other operation commands.

(Example of wing operation control based on extended command D036)
Next, an operation control example of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 performed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the extended command D036 will be described. Even when the extended command D036 is received, basically the same control as when the extended command D033 is received is executed. Therefore, the outline of the flow will be described below, and the detailed control contents will be omitted. I decided to.

As shown in FIGS. 11-29, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command D038, it reads out the parent control data table 038SG823 shown in FIG. 11-24 and sets a predetermined value (for example, the parent TC) in the parent timer counter (parent TC). 11890 ms, 100 minutes) is set. Then, with reference to the child control data table 038SG822A, the control time (for example, 6767 ms) is set in the child timer counter A (child TCA) based on the control data (6767, & XD___LMOTO_OFF [0]) initially described. Set and set the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 to the off state (non-excitation state).

Next, when the child timer counter A is timer-up (child TCA = 0), the parent timer counter is checked, and if the parent timer counter is not timer-up (parent TC> 0), it is described in the child control data table 038SG822A. The control based on the control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821B and 038SG821D is executed in order.

Next, when the parent timer counter or the child timer counter B is timer-up (parent TCA = 0 or child TCB = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 8190 ms) is set in the parent timer counter and described in the child control data table 038SG822B. The control based on the control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A and 038SG821B is repeatedly executed in order.

Next, when the parent timer counter or the child timer counter A is timer-up (parent TCA = 0 or child TCA = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 1600 ms) is set in the parent timer counter, and the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 are turned off (the parent timer counter or the child timer counter A is turned off (for example, 1600 ms). (Non-excited state).

Next, when the parent timer counter timers up (parent TCA = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 600,000 ms) is set in the parent timer counter, and the grandchild control data tables 038SG821A and 038SG821B described in the child control data table 038SG822C are controlled. The control based on the data is repeatedly executed in order.

Then, based on the final control data (600000, & XD___LMOTO_OFF [0]) described in the child control data table 038SG822C or the final control data (600000, 3, MOT_STOP) described in the grandchild control data table 038SG801A. When another operation command (for example, an operation command based on process data or an operation command based on another extended command) is received after the control is started and before the parent timer counter times up, the effect control CPU 120 Assuming that the specific condition is satisfied, the operation control of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 based on the extended command D036 is terminated, and the operation control is shifted to the operation control based on another operation command.

(Example of character panel operation control based on extended command D036)
Next, an operation control example of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D performed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the extended command D036 will be described. Even when the extended command D036 is received, basically the same control as when the extended command D033 is received is executed. Therefore, the outline of the flow will be described below, and the detailed control contents will be described. It will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-30, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command D038, it reads out the parent control data table 038SG833 shown in FIG. 11-25 and sets a predetermined value (for example, the parent TCA) in the parent timer counter A (parent TCA). , 12380ms), and the drive motors 038SG402A and 038SG402C are turned off (non-excited state) based on the control data (12380, & XD_J_LMOTO_OFF [0]) described first.

Next, when the parent timer counter A timers up (parent TCA = 0), the drive motors 038SG402A and 038SG402C rotate clockwise by sequentially executing control based on the next control data described in the parent control data table 038SG833. The operation to stop is repeatedly executed.

Next, when the parent timer counter A timers up (parent TCA = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 600,000 ms) is set in the parent timer counter, and the control data of the grandchild control data table 038SG841 described in the child control data table 038SG842A. The control based on is repeatedly executed in order.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command D036, it reads out the parent control data table 038SG843 shown in FIG. 11-25, sets a predetermined value (for example, 12380 ms) in the parent timer counter B (parent TCB), and sets the parent timer counter B (parent TCB). Based on the control data (12380, & XD_J_LMOTO_OFF [0]) described first, the drive motors 038SG402B and 038SG402D are set to the off state (non-excitation state).

Next, when the parent timer counter B timers up (parent TCB = 0), the drive motors 038SG402B and 038SG402D rotate counterclockwise by sequentially executing control based on the next control data described in the parent control data table 038SG843. The operation to stop is repeatedly executed.

Next, when the parent timer counter B timers up (parent TCB = 0), a predetermined value (for example, 600,000 ms) is set in the parent timer counter, and the control data of the grandchild control data table 038SG841B described in the child control data table 038SG842B. The control based on is repeatedly executed in order.

Then, the final control data (600000, & XD___LSHKU_D036 [0], 600000, & XD___LSMKU_D036 [0]) described in the child control data tables 038SG832, 038SG842, or the final control data described in the grandchild control data tables 038SG831, 038SG841. After starting control based on control data (600000,10, MOT_OFF) and before the parent timer counter timers up, other operation commands (for example, operation commands based on process data and operation commands based on other extended commands). ) Is received, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the operation control of the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D based on the extended command D060, and shifts to the operation control based on another operation command, assuming that the specific condition is satisfied.

(Example of character panel operation control based on extended command D008)
Next, an operation control example of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D performed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the extended command D008 will be described. Even when the extended command D008 is received, basically the same control as when the extended command D033 or D036 is received is executed. Therefore, in the following, the outline of the flow will be explained and the detailed control contents will be described. Will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 11-31, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command D008, the effect control CPU 120 reads out the parent control data tables 038SG853A to 038SG853D shown in FIGS. 11-26, and the parent timer counters A to D (parent TCA to TCD). ) Is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2000 ms), and the drive motors 038SG402A and 038SG402C are rotated clockwise and driven based on the control data (2000, & XD_J_LSHKU_CW [0], & XD_J_LSHKU_CCW [0]) described first. The motors 038SG402C and 038SG402D are rotated counterclockwise.

Next, when the parent timer counters A to D are timer-up (parent TCA to TCD = 0), control based on the final control data (6000000, & XD_J_LSHKU_STOP [0]) described in the parent control data tables 038SG853A to 038SG853D is started. If another operation command (for example, an operation command based on process data or an operation command based on another extended command) is received before the parent timer counter timers up, the effect control CPU 120 has a specific condition. Is satisfied, the operation control of the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D based on the extended command D036 is terminated, and the operation control is shifted to the operation control based on another operation command.

As described above, each control data shown in FIGS. 11-22 to 11-26 has a grandchild control data table, a child control data table higher than the grandchild control data table, and a parent control higher than the child control data table. By being composed of a data table, control data used for a series of operations of the wing 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D can be set for each of a plurality of layers.

For example, control data for opening and closing wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are set in the lowest-level grandchild control data table, and when these are opened and closed multiple times, they are opened in the child control data table. The grandchild control data table corresponding to the above and the grandchild control data table corresponding to the closure may be described in chronological order. Therefore, when changing a part of a series of operations such as increasing or decreasing the number of opening / closing operations, it is sufficient to change the control data of the child control data table, so that it becomes easy to deal with the occurrence of a defect or a design change.

On the other hand, for example, after executing a plurality of control data described in the grandchild control data table in order, the operation control based on the final control data does not end, or after the operation control based on the final control data ends, for some reason. When the transition condition is not satisfied and the operation control based on the control data of the next control data table is not performed (for example, when another operation command is not received due to the influence of power failure, error occurrence, noise, etc., or (When the timer counter of the upper control data table is cleared and the timer does not start, etc.), the control based on multiple control data described in the grandchild control data table becomes a loop state and is repeatedly executed endlessly, and the drive motor. Failure may occur such as burning of 038SG202, 038SG302, 038SG402A to 038SG402D.

Therefore, as the final control data described in the grandchild control data table, control data for controlling not to operate the drive motors 038SG202, 038SG302, 038SG402A to 038SG402D as the drive means for driving the movable body is set, and the final control is performed. By setting a control time longer than other control data (for example, 6000000 ms (100 minutes) or 600,000 ms (10 minutes)) as the data control time, the specific condition is not satisfied for some reason as described above. (For example, when other operation commands are not received due to the occurrence of power failure or noise, or when the timer counter of the upper control data table is cleared and the timer does not start), the drive motor 038SG202, Since the 038SG302 and 038SG402A to 038SG402D can be maintained for a long time in a stopped state, the control based on a plurality of control data described in the grandchild control data table becomes a loop state and is repeatedly executed endlessly. Can be suppressed.

As the control time of the final control data of the lower control data table, at least the control time for executing the operation control based on the plurality of control data described in the lower control data table is described in the upper control data table. It is preferable to set a time longer than the control time (time set in the upper timer counter) of the lower control data table.

Even when a long control time is set as the control time of the final control data in the lower control data table in this way, the control by the final control data is a control timer capable of timing the control period in which the final control data is used. When a specific condition is satisfied before the upper timer counter) is timer-up (for example, when the upper timer counter is timer-up or another operation command is received), it ends when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if control data with a longer control time than other control data is set as the control time of the final control data, the operation control based on the next control data can be smoothly transitioned to. , Wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D can be suitably suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), the control data "MOT_R_Z" used when closing the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 is shown in FIG. 11-24 and the control data based on the extended command D033 shown in FIG. 11-22. It is used as control data common to the control data based on the extended command D036 shown, and has different control times depending on whether it is used as the control data based on the extended command D033 or the control data based on the extended command D036. (For example, the extended command D033 is set to 100 ms, and the extended command D036 is set to 80 ms).

Further, the control data "MOT_SDHD_DERU_LIMIT" used when opening the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 includes the control data based on the extended command D033 shown in FIG. 11-22, the control data based on the extended command D036 shown in FIG. 11-24, and the control data. The control time is different depending on whether it is used as control data common to the above and as control data based on the extended command D033 and as control data based on the extended command D036 (for example, 100 ms for the extended command D033). The command D036 is set to execute at 80 ms).

As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (C), the control data "& XD_J_LSHKU_CW" used when rotating the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D to the right is controlled based on the extended command D033 shown in FIGS. 11-23. It is used as control data common to the data, the control data based on the extended command D036 shown in FIG. 11-25, and the control data based on the extended command D008 shown in FIG. 11-26, and the control data based on the extended command D033. The control time differs depending on whether it is used as control data based on the extended command D036, 10970 ms on the extended command D033, or 620 ms on the extended command D036. , The extended command D008 is set to execute at 2000 ms).

Further, the control data "& XD_J_LSHKU_CCW" used when rotating the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D counterclockwise is the control data based on the extension command D033 shown in FIG. 11-23 and the extension shown in FIG. 11-25. It is used as control data common to the control data based on the command D036 and the control data based on the extended command D008 shown in FIG. 11-26, and is used as the control data based on the extended command D033 and the extended command D036. It is executed with different control times (for example, 11670 ms for the extended command D033, 620 ms for the extended command D036, 2000 ms for the extended command D008) depending on whether the control data is used as the control data based on the control data or the control data based on the extended command D008. Is set to.

Further, the control data "& XD_J_LSHKU_STOP" used when stopping the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D is the control data based on the extended command D033 shown in FIGS. 11-23 and the extended command shown in FIG. 11-25. It is used as control data common to the control data based on D036 and the control data based on the extended command D008 shown in FIG. 11-26, and is used as the control data based on the extended command D033 and based on the extended command D036. It should be executed at different control times (for example, 2800 ms for the extended command D033, 660 ms for the extended command D036, and 6000000 ms for the extended command D008) depending on whether it is used as control data or as control data based on the extended command D008. Is set to.

In this way, the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are rotated in the first scene (for example, the production parts SP2-6 to SP2-8) so as to correspond to the rhythm of the production sound (first operation). ), The second motion pattern to rotate (second motion) so as to correspond to the effect display in the second scene (for example, effect part SP2-2, etc.), and the third scene (for example, effect). In (part SP2-10, etc.), it is possible to operate with the third operation pattern of rotating (third operation) so as to correspond to the operation of the movable body 32 without corresponding to the rhythm of the effect sound and the effect display. The operation control of the first operation pattern is executed using the first control data table shown in FIG. 11-25, and the operation control of the second operation pattern is executed using the second control data table shown in FIG. 11-23. The operation control of the third operation pattern is executed using the third control data table shown in FIGS. 11-26, and the first control data table, the second control data table, and the third control data table are all common first. By setting the common control data and the second common control data to be executed at different times, the data capacity can be realized by realizing a large number of operation patterns by managing the time while using the common control data. It is possible to improve the fun of the game while reducing the number of games.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is used in the character panel 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the effect of the effect part SP2-10 during the execution period of the SP reach effect (strongest) in the SP reach effect B based on the super reach variation pattern of the SP reach β. Although the embodiment in which the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in the third operation pattern based on the extended command D008 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production part prior to the SP reach effect (strongest). In N2-0 or the like, the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D may be operated in the third operation pattern based on the extended command D008.

Further, not only in the variable display period based on the super reach fluctuation pattern of SP reach α and β, but also in the variable display period based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the big hit game state, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are expanded. It may be operated by the third operation pattern based on the command D008.

(Example of cut-in effect)
Next, an example of the effect of the cut-in effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-33 to 11-34. 11-33 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a cut-in effect based on the effect pattern CP-4, and FIG. 11-33 is a diagram comparing the colors of the character panel LED and the cut-in image. 11-34 are diagrams (A) to (H) showing an example of an effect operation of a cut-in effect based on the effect pattern CP-4.

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect type execution determination process in the 038SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 has images A-1Z to A-1Z of allies A-1 to A-4 according to the determined type. After moving and displaying A-4Z toward the position where the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D corresponding to the character to be displayed are provided, the cut-in effect of operating the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D is executed. It is possible. The wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are maintained in the open state during the execution period of the cut-in effect.

Here, an example of the effect operation of the effect pattern CP-4 will be described. When the effect control CPU 120 starts the cut-in effect of the effect pattern CP-4, it first corresponds to the character panel 038SG400D in the display area 5E of the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A1) and 11-33 (A2). A cut-in image 038SG601 consisting of a band-shaped effect image 038SG611 extending from the lower right position toward the upper left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A, an image A-1Z of an ally A-1 overlapping the effect image 038SG611, and a cut-in image 038SG601 is displayed. do. Further, according to the display of the cut-in image 038SG601, the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401A is started, and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404A is started in accordance with the rotation.

Next, after finishing the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401A and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404A while displaying the cut-in image 038SG601, the display area of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A3) (A4). From the strip-shaped effect image 038SG621 extending from the lower left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400C in 5E toward the upper right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400B, and the image A-2Z of the ally A-2 overlapping the effect image 038SG621. The cut-in image 038SG602 is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the cut-in image 038SG601. Further, according to the display of the cut-in image 038SG602, the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401B is started, and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404B is started in accordance with the rotation.

Next, after finishing the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401B and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404B while displaying the cut-in images 038SG601 and 038SG602, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A5) (A6), the image display device 5 The band-shaped effect image 038SG631 extending from the upper right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400B in the display area 5E toward the lower left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400C, and the image A-3Z of the ally A-3 overlapping the effect image 038SG631. The cut-in image 038SG603 consisting of the above is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the cut-in image 038SG602. Further, according to the display of the cut-in image 038SG603, the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401C is started, and the lighting of the character panel LED 038SG404C is started in accordance with the rotation.

Next, after finishing the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401C and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404C while displaying the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG603, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A7) (A8), the image display device 5 The band-shaped effect image 038SG641 extending from the upper left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A in the display area 5E toward the lower right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400D, and the image A-4Z of the ally A-4 overlapping the effect image 038SG641. The cut-in image 038SG604 consisting of the above is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the cut-in image 038SG603. Further, in response to the display of the cut-in image 038SG604, the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401D is started, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from starting the lighting of the character panel LED 038SG404D in accordance with the rotation, the rotating portion 038SG401C is rotated. The cut-in effect ends by ending the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404C.

In the case of the effect pattern CP-1, after executing FIGS. 11-33 (A1) and (A2), the cut-in effect is completed by ending the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401A and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404A, and the effect is produced. In the case of the pattern CP-2, after executing FIGS. 11-33 (A1) to (A4), the cut-in effect is completed by ending the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401B and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404B, and the effect pattern CP In the case of -3, after executing FIGS. 11-33 (A1) to (A6), the cut-in effect ends by ending the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401C and the lighting of the character panel LED038SG404C.

As shown in FIG. 11-33 (B), the emission color (for example, blue) of the character panel LED 038SG404A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A and the display color of the cut-in image 038SG601 displayed corresponding to this character panel 038SG400A (for example, blue). For example, the blue system display color) is a common blue color (blue system color). Further, what is the emission color of the character panel LED 038SG404B of the character panel 038SG400B on the upper right (for example, yellow) and the display color of the cut-in image 038SG602 displayed corresponding to the character panel 038SG400B (for example, the display color of the yellow system). , Common yellow (yellowish color). Further, what is the emission color of the character panel LED 038SG404C of the character panel 038SG400C at the lower left (for example, green) and the display color of the cut-in image 038SG603 displayed corresponding to the character panel 038SG400C (for example, the display color of the green system). , It is said to be a common green color (greenish color). Further, the emission color of the character panel LED 038SG404D of the character panel 038SG400D at the lower right (for example, red) and the display color of the cut-in image 038SG604 displayed corresponding to the character panel 038SG400D (for example, the display color of the red system). Is a common red color (red system color).

Therefore, the relationship between the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D and the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 can be enhanced. Here, an example is illustrated in which the emission color of the character panels LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D and the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are common system colors, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display color of the print layer constituting the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D and the display color of the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 may be a common system color.

Next, a detailed display operation mode of the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-34. The cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 have different display positions and display modes of the character image and the effect image, but the display operation modes are almost the same. Therefore, the display operation mode of the cut-in image 038SG604 will be described below. The description of the display operation mode of the cut-in image 038SG601 to 038SG603 will be omitted. Further, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG603 displayed on the lower display layer is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), when the movement display of the cut-in image 038SG604 is started, the effect control CPU 120 transfers the band-shaped effect image 038SG641 to the character panel 038SG400A in the display area 5E of the image display device 5. After displaying the frame in from the corresponding upper left position, the width dimension expands while extending toward the lower right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400D as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (B) (C) (D). Move and display as shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (E), after the image A-4Z of the ally A-4 is framed in from the upper left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A in the display area 5E of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (F) (G) (H), the effect image 038SG641 is moved and displayed toward the lower right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400D while being overlapped and displayed on the front side.

Then, the image A-4Z of the ally A-4 to be moved and displayed is framed out from the lower right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400D in the display area 5E of the image display device 5, and the other rotating portions 038SG401A to The 038SG401C is stopped, and while the other character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404C are turned off, the rotating portion 038SG401D starts to rotate, and the character panel LED 038SG404D starts to light in accordance with the rotation.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the cut-in image 038SG604 toward the character panel 038SG400D corresponding to the ally A-4 of the image A-4Z constituting the cut-in image 038SG604, and then displays the character. Since the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401D of the panel 038SG400D is started, it is possible to realize a cut-in effect in which the image A-4Z of the ally A-4 and the rotating portion 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D are linked.

(Characteristic part 038SG deformation example 1)
Next, the feature portion 038SG modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-35. 11-35 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the cut-in effect as the feature portion 038SG modification 1 in FIGS. 11-35.

In the feature unit 038SG, a mode is exemplified in which the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are moved and displayed toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, and then the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are rotated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after rotating the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 corresponding to the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are provided, and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are provided. The character may be moved and displayed in a direction away from the position where the character is located.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (A), for example, when the movement display of the cut-in image 038SG601 is started, the effect control CPU 120 stops the rotating units 038SG401B to 038SG401D, and the character panel LEDs 038SG404B to 038SG404D. While the lights are turned off, the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401A corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A is started, and as shown in FIG. 11-35 (B), the band-shaped effect image 038SG611 is imaged while the rotating portion 038SG401A is rotated. After frame-in display is performed from the upper left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A in the display area 5E of the display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (C) and 11-35 (D), from the upper left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A. It is moved and displayed so that the width dimension expands while extending in the direction away from it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (E), the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A is displayed from the upper left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A in the display area 5E of the image display device 5. After the frame-in display, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (F) (G) (H), the direction away from the upper left position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400A while overlapping the effect image 038SG611 on the front side. Move toward and display.

Then, after displaying the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 to be moved and displayed in a frame out from the lower right position corresponding to the character panel 038SG400D in the display area 5E of the image display device 5, the rotation of the rotating unit 038SG401A and the character panel are displayed. The lighting of LED038SG404A is finished.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 starts rotating the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A corresponding to the cut-in image 038SG601, and then moves and displays the cut-in image 038SG601 toward the direction away from the character panel 038SG400A. You may let it. By doing so, it is possible to realize a cut-in effect in which the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 and the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A are interlocked with each other.

(Action / effect)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 038SG, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the rhythm of the effect sound in the effect parts SP2-6 to SP2-8 of the SP reach effect B. When the 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are interlocked with each other, or when the images A-1Z to A-4Z are sequentially enlarged and displayed in the effect part SP2-2 of the SP reach effect B, the enlarged display is supported. It is possible to individually rotate the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D. Further, when an extended command for controlling a movable object is received from the display control unit 123, the wing 038SG221, based on the control data described in the control data table corresponding to the received extended command, is used every predetermined time (for example, 1 ms). For control data that can execute operation control of 038SG321 and character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D and that are different from the final control data in each control data table, a control timer that can time the control period in which each control data is used (for example, The parent timer counter (parent TC), child timer counter (child TC), grandchild timer counter (grandson TC), etc.) are changed to the next control data by the timer up, and the control using each control data is terminated. On the other hand, the control by the final control data ends when the specific condition described later is satisfied before the control timer capable of measuring the control period in which the final control data is used is timed up. Let me. That is, the first control data table (see FIGS. 11-24 and 11-25) composed of the control data performing the operation corresponding to the effect sound and the second control data composed of the control data performing the operation corresponding to the specific display. In any of the control data tables (see FIGS. 11-22 and 11-23), the final control data is the final control when a specific condition is met before the period set in the final control data is timed. The data will not be used.
By doing so, the interest of the SP reach effect B can be improved by the operation of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, and the control is terminated when a specific condition is satisfied during the control by the final control data. Therefore, the control period is long as the final control data for controlling the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D so as to deal with problems such as malfunctions of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. Since the control data can be used, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D.

In particular, during the execution period of a series of productions with a story such as SP reach production (strongest), the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, etc., according to the rhythm of the production sound and the display of the character image. Operation control based on one control data table to operation control based on another control data table due to some factor as described above (for example, power failure, occurrence of error, influence of noise, etc.) If the operation control based on the control data described in one control data table is repeatedly executed, the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D correspond to the rhythm of the production sound and the display of the character image. There is a possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable due to a problem that operates in a situation where the control data is not used, but by using control data with a long control period as the final control data, it is described in one control data table. The operation control based on the final control data is terminated when a specific condition is satisfied, and the operation based on another control data table is appropriately suppressed while the trouble such as the operation control based on the control data being repeatedly executed is suppressed. It can be transferred to control.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the parent timer counter, for example, when the child timer counter A is timer-up (child TCA = 0), and specifies if the parent timer counter is not timer-up (parent TC> 0). Assuming that the condition is satisfied, the control based on the control data of the grandchild control data tables 038SG821B and 038SG821D described in the child control data table 038SG822A is executed in order.
By doing so, when a series of operations of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are partially changed by controlling a plurality of grandchild control data tables with the upper child control data table, one Since it is only necessary to change the grandchild control data table of, it becomes easier to deal with the occurrence of a problem. Further, since the control data having a long control period can be used as the final control data, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the parent timer counter when the child timer counter is timer-up (grandson TCA> 0, child TC = 0), and if the parent timer counter is not timer-up (parent TC> 0). ), Assuming that the specific condition is satisfied, the child control data table 038SG802 is next to the child control data table 038SG802 according to the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is enlarged and displayed (for example, the timing at which the character image 038SG503 is switched and displayed from SP2-3A to SP2-3B). Move (change) to the control of the control data described in.
By doing so, when a series of operations of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are partially changed by controlling a plurality of grandchild control data tables with the upper child control data table, one Since it is only necessary to change the grandchild control data table of, it becomes easier to deal with the occurrence of a problem. Further, since the control data having a long control period can be used as the final control data, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D.

Further, the plurality of control data tables are a first control data table (for example, grandchild control data tables 038SG801A, 038SG801B, 038SG821A to 038SG821D, etc.) and a control data table higher than the first control data table. A second control data table (for example, child control data tables 038SG802, 038SG822A to 038SG822C, etc.) in which a control period in which the first control data table is used and a storage destination address of the first control data table are defined, and the first control data table. A third control data table (for example, a control data table higher than the control data table, in which the control period in which the second control data table is used and the storage destination address of the second control data table are defined. , Parent control data table 038SG803, 038SG823, etc.), and the control data of the first control data table includes a control period in which the control data is used, an operation period for operating one step, an operation upper limit, and the like. Is stipulated.
By doing so, by controlling the lower grandchild control data table with the upper child control data table, the lower order is to partially change the series of operations of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. Since it is sufficient to change the grandchild control data table of, it becomes easier to deal with the occurrence of a problem.

Further, the final control data of the grandchild control data table, the child control data table, and the parent control data table has a longer period than any control data different from the final control data, and has the same special control period (for example,). 6000000 ms (100 minutes), 600,000 ms (10 minutes), etc.) are set.
By doing so, it is possible to use control data having a long control period as the final control data for each layer, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. ..

Further, in the first effect period (for example, effect part SP2-1), the control information for the movable body (for example, the extended command D033) for operating the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D is not set, so that the rotating unit is not set. In the second production period (for example, production parts SP2-2 to SP2-3), the 038SG401A to 038SG401D do not operate, and the control information for the movable body common to the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D (for example, By setting the extended command D033, etc.), special control using the control data corresponding to the control information for the movable body is executed, and in the special control, the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are executed. Will operate from the start of the second production period, and the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 will not operate from the start of the second production period, but will operate after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start (for example, from the production part SP2-3). Wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 open and close).
By doing so, the control information for the movable body is not set during the production period in which the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D are not operated as in the first production period, and the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panel 038SG400A are not set in the second production period. By setting the control information for the movable body common to ~ 038SG400D, stable operation can be performed.

When operating the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D individually, the parent control data table 038SG813A for operating the rotating parts 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A and the rotating parts 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B are operated. The parent control data table 038SG813B for operating the parent control data table 038SG813B for operating the rotating unit 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C, the parent control data table 038SG813C for operating the rotating unit 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C, and the parent control data table 038SG813D for operating the rotating unit 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D individually. On the other hand, when the rotating unit 038SG401A, 038SG401C and the rotating unit 038SG401B, 038SG401D are operated in common, the control data for rotating the rotating unit 038SG401A of the upper left character panel 038SG400A is stored in the parent control data table 038SG833. By setting, the rotating part 038SG401C of the lower left character panel 038SG400C also rotates together, and the control data for rotating the rotating part 038SG401B of the upper right character panel 038SG400B is set in the parent control data table 038SG843. , The rotating part 038SG401D of the character panel 038SG400D at the lower right also rotates together. By doing so, individual control data is used when operating individually, and only one control data is used when operating in common, so that the data capacity can be reduced.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not operate the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D until the determined effect is started in the SP reach effect A. By doing so, in the SP reach effect B, the operations of the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, which are not executed in the SP reach effect A, are executed, so that the expectation for the big hit state can be increased.

Further, when notifying that the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the big hit game state by the determined effect in the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect A, the character among the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D The rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D rotate. By doing so, in the SP reach effect A, the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D do not operate until the decision effect, but when notifying that they are controlled to the jackpot game state, the SP reach effect A is used. Since common movements are performed, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the rhythm of the effect sound by using the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the SP reach effect (strongest) of the effect parts SP2-1 to SP2-11 of the SP reach effect B. The first operation pattern for the first operation, the second operation pattern for the second operation corresponding to the effect display, and the third operation pattern for the third operation, which is different from the first operation and the second operation. And, the operation control of the first operation pattern is executed using the first control data table (for example, the control data shown in FIG. 11-25) (see FIG. 11-30), and the second operation is performed. The operation control of the second operation pattern is executed using the control data table (for example, the control data shown in FIGS. 11-23) (see FIG. 11-28), and the third control data table (for example, FIG. 11-26) is used. The operation control of the third operation pattern is executed using the shown control data) (see FIGS. 11-31), and the first control data table, the second control data table, and the third control data table are all used. The common first common control data (for example, right rotation control data "&XD_J_LSHKU_CW") and the second common control data (for example, left rotation control data "&XD_J_LSHKU_CCW") are used at different control times.
By doing so, it is possible to improve the fun of the game while reducing the data capacity by realizing a large number of operation patterns by managing the time while using common control data.

Specifically, the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D have a first operation pattern corresponding to the rhythm of the effect sound, a second operation pattern corresponding to the effect display, and a third operation corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32. Even when multiple control data are set to operate in different operation patterns such as operation patterns, the control data for basic operation such as rotating the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D to rotate clockwise, counterclockwise, and stop rotation is used as common control data. Since it is possible to realize a large number of operation patterns only by setting the control time according to each operation pattern, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design while reducing the data capacity.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can operate the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D with the first operation pattern, the second operation pattern, and the third operation pattern in the SP reach effect (strongest) of the SP reach effect B. Since the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be operated in various patterns in one production, the fun of the game is improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 uses the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D in the third operation pattern based on the extended command D008 in the effect part N2-0 before the SP reach effect (strongest). By making it operable, it is possible to improve the fun of the game in various situations while reducing the data capacity.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 rotates the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D according to the fall of the movable body 32 based on the operation control execution data of the process data, regardless of the image display and sound output to the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by being able to execute the motion control based on the third motion pattern.

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 is effective when the operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation valid period of the chance button 631B, or the operation of the chance button 631B is not detected. By executing the determined effect at the timing when the period ends, and performing the operation control based on the third operation pattern of rotating the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D in accordance with the timing of moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. , The fun of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 rotates the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D all at once in the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern, while individually rotating the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D in the second operation pattern. By doing so, each rotating unit 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be operated individually according to the effect display, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 toward the position where the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A is provided as a cut-in effect, and then rotates the character panel 038SG400A. After the first predetermined effect of operating the unit 038SG401A and the image A-2Z of the ally A-2 are moved and displayed toward the position where the rotating unit 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B is provided, the rotating unit 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B is displayed. The second predetermined effect to be operated and the image A-3Z of the ally A-3 are moved and displayed toward the position where the rotating portion 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C is provided, and then the rotating portion 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C is operated. It is possible to carry out the third predetermined effect.
By doing so, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by a plurality of cut-in effects in which the character display and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D are interlocked.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A as a cut-in effect, and then displays the image A-1Z of the ally A-1 from the position where the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A is provided. The first predetermined effect of moving and displaying the character panel 038SG400B, and the position where the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B is provided with the image A-2Z of the ally A-2 after operating the rotating part 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B. The second predetermined effect of moving and displaying the character panel 038SG400C and the rotating part 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C are provided with the image A-3Z of the ally A-3 after operating the rotating part 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C. It is possible to execute a third predetermined effect of moving and displaying the image in a direction away from the position.
By doing so, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by a plurality of cut-in effects in which the character display and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D are interlocked.

Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in effect based on the effect patterns CP-3 and CP-4, the rotation unit 038SG401A and the character panel LED038SG404A rotate the rotating unit 038SG401A while displaying the cut-in image 038SG601. After the lighting is finished, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A3) (A4), the cut-in image 038SG602 is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the cut-in image 038SG601. By doing so, when the display of the cut-in image 038SG602 is started, the rotation of the rotating portion 038SG401A operated by the display of the cut-in image 038SG601 is stopped. Therefore, pay attention to the display of the cut-in image 038SG602. Can be done.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect part SP2-11 to notify that the variable display result is a big hit or a miss after executing the cut-in effect in the effect part SP2-11. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's expectation before notifying that the variable display result is a big hit or a miss.

As the cut-in effect, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on which of the pattern CP-1, the pattern CP-2, the pattern CP-3, and the pattern CP-4 is executed, that is, the pattern CP-1, the pattern. Since the jackpot expectations of CP-2, pattern CP-3, and pattern CP-4 are different, it is possible to pay attention to the number of displayed cut-in images to be executed.

Further, when the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are in the open state, the visibility of the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D is higher than when they are in the closed state, and the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are maintained in the open state during the execution period of the cut-in effect. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the movement of each rotating portion 038SG401A to 038SG401D rather than the opening / closing operation of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321.

Further, the rotating portion 038SG401A of the character panel 038SG400A and the image A-1Z have a common blue color, the rotating portion 038SG401B of the character panel 038SG400B and the image A-2Z have a common yellow color, and the rotating portion 038SG401C of the character panel 038SG400C. Since the images A-3Z have a common green color, the relationship between the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D and the images A-1Z to A-4Z can be enhanced.

Further, the character panel LEDs 038SG404A to 038SG404D are turned off when the corresponding rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are in the non-operating state, and can be turned on when the corresponding rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are in the operating state. Parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D can be made to stand out.

Further, the effect images 038SG611 to 038SG631 gradually widen in the direction in which the images A-1Z to A-4Z are moved and displayed, and extend in a direction common to the direction in which the images A-1Z to A-4Z are moved and displayed. By displaying in the embodiment, the effect images 038SG611 to 038SG631 corresponding to the movement display of the images A-1Z to A-4Z can suitably enhance the interlocking feeling with the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D.

Although the feature portion 038SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and there are changes and additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Is also included in the present invention.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
In the feature unit 038SG, the wing 038SG221 and 038SG321 are applied as the first movable body, and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are applied as the second movable body, but the present invention is limited thereto. Wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 may be applied as the second movable body, and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D may be applied as the first movable body, for example, provided in the game area. The movable body 32, the elevating body 038SG121 of the first effect unit 038SG100 provided on the opening / closing door frame 50, and the like may be applied, and various changes can be made.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, as a specific effect of outputting the effect sound and interlocking the first movable body and the second movable body in accordance with the rhythm of the effect sound, the effect part SP2-6 of the SP reach effect B ~ The embodiment in which the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 are opened and closed and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D are rotated in correspondence with the rhythm (sound effect) of the effect sound (BGM) output in SP2-8 has been illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. It is not limited, and if the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated according to the rhythm of the production sound, for example, the sound effect (large) is output after the sound effect (small) is output. Wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D may be interlocked until they are output, that is, at a timing when no sound effect is output. That is, if the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D are interlocked with each other at a predetermined rhythm, the interlocking operation may be performed at a timing other than the output timing of the sound effect (beat).

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, a mode in which a sound effect (beat) is output with a predetermined rhythm during a period in which the BGM of the music is continuously output is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the BGM is not continuously output, the sound effect (beat) may be output with a predetermined rhythm.

Further, the interlocking operation of the first movable body (wings 038SG221, 038SG321) and the second movable body (rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D) means that the first movable body and the second movable body are operated at the same timing for the same period. The operation start timing, operation end timing, and operation period may be different between the first movable body and the second movable body as long as they are operated in accordance with the rhythm. Further, if at least one of the first movable body (wings 038SG221, 038SG321) and the second movable body (rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D) can operate in accordance with the rhythm of the effect sound, it is not necessarily the first movable body. It is not necessary that the second movable body and the second movable body operate in conjunction with each other.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, as an example of causing the second movable body to perform a specific operation different from the interlocking operation at a specific time when a special image is displayed by the display means in the specific effect, the effect control CPU 120 reaches the SP. In the effect part SP2-2 of the effect B, the enlarged images A-1Z to the enlarged display during the display period from the start to the end of the enlarged display of the images A-1Z to A-4Z as special images. Although the embodiment in which the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D corresponding to A-4Z are individually rotated is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and one image (for example, image A-4Z) to another image (for example, image A-4Z) is illustrated. For example, the rotation units 038SG401A to 038SG401D corresponding to one image or another image may be started to rotate at the timing of switching to A-3Z). That is, if the operation is different from the interlocking operation of the first movable body (wings 038SG221, 038SG32) and the second movable body (rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D), the operation mode is adjusted to the display of the special image as described above. It is not limited to the one that operates by the above, and may be the one that operates regardless of the display of the special image.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, as an example of the first scene, the second scene, and the third scene, the production parts such as the production parts SP2-6 to SP2-8, the production part SP2-2, and the production part SP2-10 are applied. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, at least one frame (effect screen) constituting one production part such as SP2-6A, SP2-6B, SP2-6C, and the like. You may apply a series of shots (directed scenes) organized at the same time, the same place, the same action, etc., such as the execution period of SP reach production (battle confrontation or fortress destruction), and each scene may be applied. The constituent period and the like can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, a plurality of control data tables composed of control data (for example, a lower control data table (grandchild control data table)) are used as operation control data for operating the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D. And a middle control data table which is a control data table higher than the lower control data table and in which the control period in which the lower control data table is used and the storage destination address of the upper control data table are defined. A child control data table), a control data table higher than the middle control data table, a control period in which the middle control data table is used, and a storage destination address of the middle control data table are defined. The upper control data table (parent control data table) and the mode in which the control data table is set are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more control data tables having different hierarchies are set. Alternatively, one control data table may be set. Further, if the control data is set, the control data table may not necessarily be set. Further, the control data table may be at least one. As long as it is composed of the control data of, it does not necessarily have to be composed of a plurality of control data.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, for example, 6000000 ms (100 minutes) or 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is set as the control time of the final control data among the plurality of control data. The control time is not limited to this, and a control time having a length other than the above may be set.

Further, the feature unit 038SG exemplifies a mode in which a common control time such as 6000000 ms (100 minutes) or 6000000 ms (10 minutes) is set as the control time of a plurality of final control data. The control time is not limited to, and different control times may be set as the control time of each final control data.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, the effect control CPU 120 has a specific condition that triggers the termination of the control based on the final control data before the control timer capable of timing the control period in which the final control data is used is timer-up. As an example of establishment, a timer counter (for example, child TC) set in a control data table (for example, child control data table) higher than the control data table (for example, grandchild control data table) in which the final control data is described is set. ) Increases the timer and receives other operation commands (for example, operation commands based on process data and operation commands based on other extended commands). The control board 12 is not limited, and for example, the effect control board 12 receives control information (for example, a background designation command, a game state designation command, etc.) output from the main board 11, and the control information (for example, background designation). The effect image displayed during the period when the effect control CPU 120 is executing the control based on the final control data, based on the reception of commands, game state specification commands, etc.) or regardless of the reception of the control information. It may include switching and displaying a background image, displaying a special effect image, outputting an effect effect sound, a special sound, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, as final control data for controlling the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D so as not to operate, the drive motors 038SG202 and 038SG302 and the drive motors 038SG402A to 038SG402D are stopped or turned off. , The mode in which the control data for operating the drive motors 038SG202, 038SG302 and the drive motors 038SG402A to 038SG402D is set little by little is illustrated, but the final control data for controlling the movable body so as not to operate completely completes the operation of the movable body. The control data may be stopped, or may be, for example, control data in which the amount of operation per predetermined time is smaller than usual.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, the display control unit 123 generates an image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area as image data for displaying on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area, and the image data. This is an example of a mode in which an extended command is generated and transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 when performing display processing for outputting the image as a video signal, that is, when displaying image data on the image display device 5. The extended command is not limited to, but is for displaying the timing at which the display control unit 123 draws an image in the image drawing area in the VRAM area and the drawn image on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area. It may be output at the timing generated as the image data of.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute operation control to operate the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D based on the reception of the extended command output from the display control unit 123. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D are provided based only on the operation control execution data set in the process data, regardless of the extended command. You may make it work.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a mode in which the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D are operated in the fourth movable pattern regardless of the reception of the extended command in some effect parts. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the wings 038SG221, 038SG321 and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D may all be executed based on the reception of the extended command. Further, the operation control of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D may be executed in the production part other than the above.

Further, the feature portion 038SG exemplifies a mode in which the rotating portions 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are applied as the special movable body, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, the wing 038SG221. 038SG321 may be applied, or a movable body 32 provided in the game area, an elevating body 038SG121 of the first effect unit 038SG100 provided in the opening / closing door frame 50, or the like may be applied, and various changes can be made.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, as a third operation pattern for performing the third operation different from the first operation and the second operation, the third operation of rotating the rotating units 038SG401A to 038SG401D according to the falling operation of the movable body 32. Although the form to which the pattern is applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the operation pattern causes an operation different from the display matching and the sound matching, the operation control execution data set in the process data can be used. A fourth operation pattern based on the above may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, as the operation of the first movable body, the second movable body, and the special movable body, the opening / closing operation of the wings 038SG221 and 038SG321 and the rotation of the rotating parts 038SG401A to 038SG401D of the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are applied. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation mode of these movable bodies can be variously changed, and may be a slide movement or a deformation operation as well as opening / closing and rotation.

In the feature portion 038SG and the modification 1, the effects images 038SG611 to 038SG641 constituting the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are moved and displayed, and then the images A-1Z to A-4Z constituting the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are moved and displayed. By moving and displaying, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the moving display of the images A-1Z to A-4Z of the allies A-1 to A-4.

Further, in the feature portion 038SG and the modification 1, after the effect images 038SG611, 038SG621, 038SG631, and 038SG641 constituting the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are moved and displayed, the ally A-1 constituting the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 is displayed. Although the embodiment of moving and displaying the images A-1Z to A-4Z of A-4 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect images 038SG611, 038SG621, 038SG631, 038SG641 and allies A-1 to A-1. The images A-1Z to A-4Z of A-4 may be moved and displayed together.

Further, in the feature portion 038SG and the modification 1, the width dimension extends toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D or toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D while extending the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604. The present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in image 038SG601 to 038SG604 is directed toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, or the corresponding character panel 038SG400A. It may be moved and displayed without enlarging the width dimension while extending toward the direction away from ~ 038SG400D, toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, or toward the direction away from the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. It may be moved and displayed so that the width dimension is reduced while being stretched.

Further, in the feature portion 038SG and the modification 1, the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 are moved and displayed so as to extend toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D or toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 of a predetermined size are directed toward the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, or the corresponding character panels 038SG400A to. It may be moved and displayed without being stretched toward the direction away from 038SG400D.

Further, in the feature portion 038SG and the modification 1, the positions where the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are provided and the positions corresponding to the character panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D are the characters in the display area where the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 can be displayed. It is preferable that the position is near the panels 038SG400A to 038SG400D, but if the position is closer to the corresponding character panel than the other character panels that do not correspond to one cut-in image, it is not necessarily the position near the corresponding character panel. May be good.

Further, in the feature portion 038SG and the modification 1, the cut-in images 038SG601 to 038SG604 exemplify a form composed of a character image and an effect image, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the character image is not limited thereto. Alternatively, it may be composed of only one of the effect images, or may include an image other than the character image and the effect image.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the advantageous states that are advantageous for the player are not only the big hit game state, the probability change state, the time saving state, etc., but also the small hit game state, the reach state, the pseudo-ream production state, the hold ream, and the chance. Variable display results, controls, and effects such as up effect, pre-reading notice effect, time reduction loss, and ceiling time reduction control described later may be included. Further, in the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winning, assist time (AT) winning, replay time (RT) winning, bonus winning and the like may be included.

Further, in the feature unit 038SG, as a pachinko gaming machine, a so-called type 1 and two types of gaming machines that can be controlled to a big hit gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small hit in a short time state after the big hit game is applied are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a so-called one type of pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game, and the playability can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like are exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is used for gaming. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given according to the prize are added, while the number of game balls used for the game is The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified, and the variable display result is derived from the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines where winning is possible.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least a machine that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A display means capable of displaying at least a first character display, a second character display different from the first character display, and a third character display different from the second character display.
The first movable body corresponding to the first character display, the second movable body provided at a position different from the first movable body and corresponding to the second character display, the first movable body and the second movable body. A plurality of movable bodies including a third movable body provided at a position different from the body and corresponding to the third character display, and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first predetermined effect of moving and displaying the first character display toward a position where the first movable body is provided and then operating the first movable body.
A second predetermined effect of moving and displaying the second character display toward a position where the second movable body is provided and then operating the second movable body.
A third predetermined effect in which the third character display is moved and displayed toward a position where the third movable body is provided and then the third movable body is operated.
Is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that. It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A display means capable of displaying at least a first character display, a second character display different from the first character display, and a third character display different from the second character display.
The first movable body corresponding to the first character display, the second movable body provided at a position different from the first movable body and corresponding to the second character display, the first movable body and the second movable body. A plurality of movable bodies including a third movable body provided at a position different from the body and corresponding to the third character display, and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first predetermined effect of operating the first movable body and then moving and displaying the first character display in a direction away from the position corresponding to the first movable body.
A second predetermined effect of operating the second movable body and then moving and displaying the second character display in a direction away from the position corresponding to the second movable body.
A third predetermined effect of operating the third movable body and then moving and displaying the third character display in a direction away from the position corresponding to the third movable body.
Is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images